The outlook on body hair has certainly changed in recent years, and yet, the global hair removal market was worth more than $29 billion in 2025, proof that many of us are still hellbent on removing every last trace of it.

Since my teens, I’ve used everything from bleach, stinky depilatory creams and the best razors, to more painful options promising longer-lasting results - epilators, roll-on electric waxers, and in-clinic laser hair removal. Without a doubt, the latter has been the most successful, but salon appointments add up and demand time and dedication.

So when I found out Tria was launching a brand new upgraded version of their laser hair removal device, promising long-term hair reduction from the comfort and privacy of your own home, the prude in me was ecstatic.

At almost £600, it’s not cheap, but this is clinic-grade laser tech. The before and after images online are compelling, but would it work for this dark-haired girl? After testing it for the last two months, this Tria 4X Hair Removal Laser review will cover the pros, cons and those all-important results.

Our Beauty Editor’s Tria 4X Hair Removal Laser review, with before and after pictures

On first impression, this second generation of the Tria 4X Hair Removal Laser looks a lot more professional than its predecessor, which was white and a bit plastic-y. This looks slicker with a gunmetal makeover and a thicker, sturdier shell.

According to Tria, this helps to improve thermal performance, but it also helps to give the impression that this is a serious tool that will yield real results. It’s been upgraded with an LCD, which shows the battery life, the laser levels from 1-5, and a running count of laser pulses for each session.

In the box you’ll find refreshingly little - a charging cable, various plug adaptors, and some instructions, tucked neatly beneath the device. After charging, the device remains in locked mode until the sensor approves your skin tone for use. You switch it on and hold the skin sensor, located on the base of the device, against your skin. If your skin tone is compatible, the device will unlock with a beep, and you’re good to go.

How does the Tria 4X Hair Removal Laser work?

There are a lot of hair removal devices on the market, but the Tria 4X Hair Removal Laser operates at the same 810nm wavelength used in clinics. This precision diode laser technology should not be confused with IPL tools (intense pulse light), which are not as effective as laser.

In fact, the Tria laser delivers up to 233 per cent more power than some leading IPL devices, owing to deeper penetration and targeted energy delivery, so if you’re weighing up the two, I’d put my money into the laser.

The Tria 4X Hair Removal Laser targets the pigment in your hair. This melanin absorbs the laser energy and converts it to heat in the follicle to destroy the root. That’s why the most successful combination for effective treatment is lighter skin with dark hair. The device picks up the contrast more easily.

It’s also why the device is not safe on darker skin tones and is ineffective on lighter hair shades. For medium brown, dark brown and black skin tones, it’s best to visit a professional who can use specific wavelengths to safely and effectively target hairs.

As the root is destroyed, hair regrowth becomes finer and lighter. With continued treatment, you can expect to see fewer hairs reappearing, and then once the hair follicle has been deactivated, hair will not grow back at all.

How to use the Tria 4X Hair Removal Laser

First things first, you need to shave the area you wish to treat. Your razor is going to become your best friend during your relationship with the Tria 4X Hair Removal Laser. Waxing, epilating and any other treatments that drag the root kicking and screaming from its follicle will hinder the results. The laser needs the root to be in tact in order to disable it.

Skin should be clean and dry, then it’s time to get zapping. It really couldn’t be easier to use. Select your treatment level from one to five, using the highest setting you can tolerate. Obviously pain is subjective, but I’ve found it pinchy at worst with no subsequent redness, and that’s using the highest setting. However, Tria does recommend applying the Phytograph Hydrating Calm Soothing Gel before using the device to help minimise discomfort.

Once the level is set, hold the device against your skin making sure the treatment window is pressed flat until you hear two beeps - that means the pulse has worked and you can move on to the next spot.

Laser hair removal on the face is quick - I’ve found I can do my upper lip in about 60 seconds. Elsewhere, armpits have taken less than five minutes. But because of the small treatment tip, larger areas like the legs will take much longer. Tria recommends repeating the treatment every two weeks for up to three months.

Tria 4X Hair Removal Laser: my verdict

After about two months, and three treatments on my upper lip, there has been headway. I didn’t notice much change after the first session, but now I can definitely see that the hair is finer, patchier, and not quite so dark. It’s by no means bald, but I’m sufficiently buoyed by the results that I feel compelled to carry on for the six session minimum Tria recommends.

It's a big outlay for the device, and certainly in-clinic laser hair removal treatments have become more affordable over the last few years. But I really appreciate that I can use the Tria whenever, wherever. I don’t have to schlep to the clinic, or bear the embarrassment of de-robing in front of a stranger, depending on where you’re choosing to de-fuzz. For ease of use and convenience, this is a fantastic option for long-term hair reduction.

When it comes to kitchen gadgets, the most useful ones are often the ones that you hardly notice, because they sit so seamlessly into your routine. A hand blender might not be the most exciting purchase, but a good one can be like having a sous chef to make silky soups and homemade sauces whilst also handling quick chopping and mashing from one handle.

Not all hand blenders are made equal, so finding the best hand blender is about more than just looking at the power; it needs to be comfortable to use, versatile enough to tackle different jobs and reliable enough to reach for time and time again. The Morphy Richards Hand Blender aims to tick all three boxes, combining a stainless steel blending attachment with a chopping bowl, potato masher and balloon whisk to create an all-in-one appliance designed to replace several single-purpose tools.

We wanted to put paper claims to the proper test in our kitchens, so asked Sarah, a passionate home cook and baker who spends hours experimenting in the kitchen, to put it through its paces. As someone who has tested plenty of gadgets over the years (and knows exactly when something deserves permanent cupboard space) Sarah was impressed by its versatility, although she found some attachments more successful than others.

How we test hand blenders

Unboxing the Morphy Richards Hand Blender Set

The Morphy Richards Hand Blender makes a good first impression straight out of the box. Each attachment is individually wrapped and clearly labelled, making it easy to identify the different components before you start cooking. The setup process is simple too, with a straightforward instruction manual that gets you up and running quickly, which exactly what you want from an appliance designed around convenience.

Sarah was particularly impressed by the solid feel of the main attachments. "The hand blender and chopping bowl felt sturdy straight away," she says. The whisk attachment, however, didn't inspire quite the same confidence, feeling noticeably lighter and less robust in comparison. This is something worth bearing in mind if you're planning to use the appliance regularly for baking, where a more powerful and durable whisk can make a difference.

One of the biggest positives for Sarah was the lightweight design. Having spent years cooking and testing kitchen gadgets, she knows that comfort matters just as much as performance, especially when you're holding an appliance for longer periods. "The appliance feels pleasantly light to use, which was a bonus for me as I have arthritis in my thumbs and wrists," she explains.

For anyone who struggles with heavier kitchen appliances, this is a real advantage. The Morphy Richards Hand Blender is definitely designed for everyday use, with a comfortable grip and manageable weight that makes blending, chopping and mashing feel far less of a chore. It may not have the most premium feel across every attachment, but the thoughtful design means it should suit cooks who want a practical, easy-to-handle appliance rather than another bulky gadget taking up space in the kitchen.

What's the Morphy Richards Hand Blender Set like to use?

The Morphy Richards Hand Blender is at its best when tackling everyday cooking jobs. The stainless steel hand blender delivers smooth results, whether you're blending soups, sauces or vegetables, while the chopping bowl takes the hard work out of prep. The potato masher is another welcome addition, which isn't a guarantee with all hand blender sets. It made light work of fluffy mash without the elbow grease. Sarah found that it's only the balloon whisk that feels less convincing, lacking the power and stability needed for more demanding baking tasks.

The hand blender quickly became Sarah's favourite attachment. "It was the star of the show," she says. "It transformed my frozen home-grown tomatoes into a beautifully velvety sauce that honestly looked and tasted restaurant-quality." She's used it for pasta and pizzas alike and thinks even an Italian would give it a thumbs up.

The chopping bowl also proved itself in day-to-day cooking. Sarah, who cooks from scratch most days, noted that when making salsa, she "really appreciated how quickly and efficiently the chopping bowl tackled onions, garlic and chilli," she says. "It feels like a labour-saving gadget." The potato masher is equally successful, producing smooth, creamy mash in seconds. "The potato masher worked brilliantly," Sarah says. "Proper comfort-food mash with hardly any effort at all."

The only attachment that didn't quite live up to the others was the balloon whisk. While Sarah found it whipped cream effectively, it struggled with the demands of making meringue. "The balloon whisk was unfortunately the weak point for me," she says. "I actually ended up decorating both myself and the kitchen with egg whites after letting go of the beaker for a split second." She added that it "worked beautifully for cream", but felt she needed something "sturdier and more powerful" for whisking egg whites. It's perfectly capable, but keen bakers who regularly make meringues, macarons or large batches of cake batter will probably still want a dedicated electric hand mixer.

Who would the Morphy Richards Hand Blender Set suit?

• Students and first-time renters: one appliance covers blending, mashing and whisking, without taking up valuable cupboard space.
• Small households: ideal if you're cooking for one or two people and don't need a collection of specialist gadgets.
• Minimalists: the interchangeable attachments mean you can replace several single-purpose appliances with one compact tool.
• Budget-conscious cooks: buying one versatile appliance is often better value than investing in separate gadgets.

The Morphy Richards Hand Blender is best suited to cooks who value versatility over specialist performance. If your kitchen cupboards are already overflowing, or you're furnishing a first home, it will help to streamline your collection without leaving you feeling short-changed. Rather than reaching for three different gadgets, you can blend soups, mash potatoes and whisk cream with the same motor unit.

That's exactly what stood out to our tester, Sarah. "I absolutely loved the multi-purpose nature of the appliance," she says. "For someone living alone, in a smaller home, or simply trying not to overcrowd the kitchen with gadgets, this makes a lot of sense." Given that Sarah spends much of her time cooking from scratch and has tested plenty of kitchen gadgets over the years, it's a recommendation I'd take seriously. If an appliance earns a permanent place in her cupboards, it's probably earned one in yours too.

Who might want something different?

Sarah feels keen bakers or those regularly making meringues may still prefer a standalone mixer with a more substantial whisk attachment. She also pointed out that buyers prioritising sleek aesthetics over practicality may not fall in love with the design.

“This is very much a practical, hardworking kitchen tool rather than a stylish showpiece for the worktop,” she said. “But personally, I care much more about functionality than appearances.”

Is the Morphy Richards Hand Blender Set good value?

The Morphy Richards Hand Blender's biggest selling point is its versatility. Sarah notes that this is "a brilliant budget buy," she says. "When you consider that it blends, chops and mashes this well, it really does cover a lot of kitchen jobs in one appliance." Given how much time Sarah spends cooking from scratch, it's a strong endorsement that she sees this as a gadget worth making space for.

That said, this isn't an appliance designed to replace every kitchen gadget. Keen bakers who regularly make meringues, macarons or large batches of whisked recipes may still prefer a dedicated mixer with a more powerful attachment. The design is also focused firmly on practicality rather than aesthetics. "This is very much a practical, hardworking kitchen tool rather than a stylish showpiece for the worktop," Sarah says. "But personally, I care much more about functionality than appearances."

Should you buy the Morphy Richards Hand Blender Set?

The Morphy Richards Hand Blender isn't without its limitations, but Sarah found it to be a useful and capable appliance for everyday cooking. Its strongest attachments, particularly the hand blender, chopping bowl and masher, make it a versatile addition to the kitchen, while the weaker whisk attachment feels like a small compromise rather than a dealbreaker.

For anyone looking for one appliance that can handle a range of everyday tasks without taking up too much space, this is a smart choice. It may not replace a dedicated mixer for keen bakers, but its combination of practicality, performance and affordability makes it a reliable kitchen helper. As Sarah concludes: "It’s not perfect, but when several of the attachments perform this well, it absolutely deserves serious consideration as an everyday kitchen helper."

The Origin Hybrid has become one of the brand's best-selling mattresses, promising premium comfort, impressive cooling technology and a luxury hotel feel without the premium price tag. With a plush pillow top, 3,000 individually pocketed springs and specialist foam layers designed to regulate temperature, it's perfect for anyone who needs help sleeping in the heat, without blowing the budget.

With so many brands competing for a place among the best cooling mattresses, it's easy to become sceptical of lofty sleep claims. Origin says its Hybrid combines IceCool ThermoFoam, SnowTencel fabric and BambooAir technology to keep sleepers comfortable throughout the night, while offering enough support for couples with different sleeping styles and body weights. We wanted to find out whether it delivers on both fronts.

Our tester, Holly, has been sleeping on the Origin Hybrid with her husband for almost a year. As she approached her late forties, finding a mattress that could help with night-time overheating became a priority. "I've always been a bit of a sweaty sleeper," she says, "but add in fluctuating hormones, drunk teenagers waking me at 3am and a rather large, fluffy cocker spaniel sleeping on my feet and I'm reaching temperatures hotter than the sun." Could the Origin Hybrid be the answer? "With materials named IceCool ThermoFoam, SnowTencel and BambooAir, I felt like I was edging closer to sleep that resembled floating on a cloud in a gentle breeze instead of a bed of molten lava." Here's how it performed after months of testing.

Origin Hybrid Mattress review

• RRP: From £379
• Warranty: 15 years
• Sizes: Single, Small Double, Double, King, Superking
• Filling: Cooling hybrid
• Comfort: medium-firm
• Hypoallergenic: yes
• Thickness: 26 cm
• Trial Period: 200 nights

Who would the Origin Hybrid Mattress suit?

• Hot sleepers - the open structure and specialised gel layer offer as much temperature regulation as a hybrid mattress can
• Front and back sleepers - thanks to the even layer of responsive springs and foam that contour to the body
• People with back or joint pain - the foam offers impressive pressure relief and tailored support
• Price conscious shoppers: this offers excellent value for money

Naturally, as a hybrid mattress, this suits sleepers who need a balance of foam pressure-relief and spring-like support. Often, this means that sleepers who suffer with back or joint pain get the most out of a hybrid mattress, but that doesn't mean that pain-free sleepers won't suit the Origin Hybrid.

As one of the brand's best-sellers, it's clear this suits plenty of people. With infusions of bamboo and wool, as well as springs, the heating effects of foam are minimised, meaning you're less likely to get the overheating feeling that comes with foam. In fact, our tester, Holly commented on the "refreshed" feeling of her skin in the morning.

Origin Hybrid Mattress Composition

• 100% SnowTencel removable top cover: The zip-off cover is made from a soft, breathable fabric that's designed to wick moisture away from the body. Unlike many mattresses, you can remove and machine wash the cover, making it easier to keep your sleep surface fresh.
• SnowTencel fibre: Sitting beneath the cover is another breathable layer that helps air circulate through the mattress while adding a plush, cushioned feel when you first lie down.
• FibreOrigin layer: This fibre layer acts as a transition between the comfort foams and support core. It helps distribute weight more evenly across the mattress, improving pressure relief while maintaining airflow.
• HexaGrid layer: This is a hexagonal comfort layer that flexes independently under different parts of your body. It compresses more deeply around heavier areas, such as your shoulders and hips, while remaining supportive elsewhere to encourage healthy spinal alignment.
• IceCool Foam: This pressure-relieving foam is infused with cooling technology to reduce heat retention, helping to draw warmth away from your body throughout the night. It also contours around pressure points without creating the enveloping feeling that some traditional memory foams can.
• Bamboo-infused wool: Bamboo fibres are naturally breathable and moisture-wicking, while the wool adds softness and helps regulate temperature in both warm and cool conditions. Together, this layer is designed to create a drier, more comfortable sleeping environment.
• ErgoCoil steel springs: At the heart of the mattress are more than 3,000 individually wrapped ErgoCoil steel springs. These respond independently to movement, helping to minimise motion transfer between partners while providing targeted support around the hips, shoulders and lower back.
• D-2 Edge Support: High-density foam runs around the perimeter of the mattress to reinforce the edges. This helps prevent the sides from collapsing when you sit or sleep near them, increasing the usable sleeping surface and making it easier to get in and out of bed.

Like many shoppers, I pay close attention to the materials that go into a mattress, and Origin has made some thoughtful choices here. The cover incorporates TENCEL™ fibres, which are derived from sustainably sourced wood pulp and prized for their naturally breathable, moisture-wicking properties. Alongside this, the brand uses bamboo-derived fibres to encourage airflow through the sleep surface and help create a fresher sleeping environment.

It's encouraging to see Origin investing in more responsibly sourced materials, although sustainability isn't the brand's primary selling point. If you're specifically looking for a mattress with stronger environmental credentials or carbon-neutral initiatives, there are brands that go further in this area. However, for shoppers who prioritise comfort and performance first, the Origin Hybrid's material choices are a welcome bonus rather than simply a marketing talking point.

Unboxing the Origin Hybrid Mattress

Mattresses aren't deliveries that can come out of the blue: they're all big and bulky, even if you've invested in a bed in a box option. Holly was really pleased with Origin's communication and delivery, which meant she could prepare well in advance of it arriving. The delivery drivers were helpful and friendly too, which is an experience many people have commented on when reviewing Origin's mattresses.

Holly noted that the large, long carboard box was easy to remove and the mattress came out of all its wrapping easily. Some hybrid mattresses need some time to rest and breathe, but the Origin Hybrid "bounced into shape right away" according to Holly. She noted right away that this feels like "a quality mattress that will go the distance." Whilst first impressions aren't everything, they are important.

What is the Origin Hybrid Mattress like to sleep on?

When we're testing mattresses, we're looking at a few factors:

• How comfortable is it to sleep in different positions?
• How comfortable is it throughout the night?
• Is the edge-to-edge support good?
• What is the motion transfer like if you share a bed?
• Is it cooling and breathable?

Holly has now been sleeping on the Origin Hybrid Mattress with her partner for almost a year, giving us an excellent long-term picture of how it performs beyond those all-important first impressions. Like many of the best hybrid mattresses I've tested, it strikes a careful balance between pressure relief and support, pairing foam comfort layers with individually wrapped springs that respond independently to movement across the bed.

During her first few weeks, Holly found the perimeter slightly softer than she expected, particularly when sitting on the edge of the mattress. However, once lying down in her usual back and side-sleeping position, those concerns disappeared. "There's a lovely balance of firmness and cosiness," she told me. "It's responsive, supportive and moulds to your body." That combination is exactly what I'd expect from a well-designed hybrid. The foam contours around pressure points at the shoulders and hips, while the pocket springs provide underlying support that helps keep your spine in a neutral position rather than allowing you to sink too deeply.

One of the biggest advantages of a quality hybrid mattress is its ability to isolate movement, and Holly found this was one of the Origin's standout strengths. Despite sharing the bed every night, she noticed very little disturbance when her partner got up or changed position. "It absorbed the shift in weight comfortably and without complaint," she said. While no mattress can eliminate motion transfer entirely, the combination of responsive foam and individually pocketed springs does an excellent job of preventing movement from travelling across the sleep surface, making it a particularly good choice for couples.

Temperature regulation is another area we pay close attention to during mattress testing. Cooling technology can't eliminate night sweats altogether, but the right materials can help dissipate heat and moisture more effectively than traditional memory foam. Holly noticed a tangible difference after switching to the Origin Hybrid, telling me she had "definitely noticed a reduction in night sweats. Not completely, but enough to stop washing sopping wet sheets every single day." More importantly, she said she woke up feeling noticeably fresher in the mornings, and she's since recommended the mattress to several friends who also struggle with overheating at night.

Should you buy the Origin Hybrid Mattress?

Putting the question of whether the Origin Hybrid Mattress is good value to Holly, gets an emphatic and resounding positive response. She loves the "luxurious, airy sleep experience" that this offers, which is only made more satisfying my the friendly price tag. If you're a hot sleeper who's looking to get as much help to stay cool at night, this will go a long way towards helping you - and it will do so on a budget too.

How we test mattresses

If you're keen to know more of what goes on behind the scenes, it helps to know a little bit more about the person who tested it, Holly Johnson. She's part of our Tester Network where readers, like you, test products for us. She's been sleeping on the Origin Hybrid for nearly a year and is generally fit and healthy. however, with peri-menopause symptoms tipping her from a hot sleeper into an unbearably hot sleeper, she needed to change her mattress for a more breathable cooling option.

Holly also sleeps on her side and likes a a medium-firm mattress to support her, whilst still cushion her shoulder and joints so that she doesn't get crushed overnight. We matched this mattress to her and sent her our criteria for how we test mattresses, to make sure we could give you a holistic idea of what the mattress is like to sleep on.

If you've never come across Ninja's Luxe Café coffee machines before, you're in for a treat. While the brand might be better known for air fryers and blenders, it's spent more than a decade refining its coffee range, taking on established names like Sage and De'Longhi with capable espresso machines that don't intimidate beginners.

The Luxe Café Mini Plus is its smallest semi-automatic espresso machine yet, shrinking the footprint of the classic models by around 30% without sacrificing the integrated grinder, automatic steam wand or hands-on brewing experience that made the original Luxe Café such a success. It's designed for people who want café-quality coffee without surrendering half their worktop.

Having tested a whole range of coffee machines, from Sage's premium espresso machines to fully automatic bean-to-cup models, I was curious to see whether Ninja could genuinely deliver the same performance in a smaller package. After several weeks of brewing everything from straight espresso to iced lattes, I think this might be one of the smartest compact coffee machines currently available.

Ninja Luxe Café Mini Plus Espresso Machine review

• RRP: £499.99
• Weight: 8.8 kgs
• Dimensions: 26 x 31 x 35 cm (LWH)
• Cord length: 87.88cm
• Wattage: 1650 watts
• Grind sizes: 60
• Coffee settings: espresso, filter, steaming
• Included: portafilter, single and double baskets, funnel, assisted tamper, milk jug
• Warranty: 2 years
  

Who would the Ninja Luxe Café Mini Plus Espresso Machine suit?

• Cold and hot coffee drinkers: this has a menu that spans both styles
• Smaller kitchens needing to save space: the compact design comes without compromise
• Coffee connoisseurs who like to feel like a barista: you can tweak and grind coffee like you would see in your local café
• Anyone looking for an alternative to the Sage Bambino: this is still compact and comes with a grinder integrated

The Luxe Café Mini Plus strikes a clever balance between convenience and control, so it'll appeal to a broad range of coffee aficionados.

If your coffee order changes with the weather, you'll appreciate that it handles both hot and iced drinks equally well. Espresso, americanos, filter coffee and iced coffees all sit on the same intuitive menu, while the automatic steam wand can produce everything from silky latte milk to cold foam.

It's also one of the best options I've tested for smaller kitchens. Integrated grinders are normally reserved for much larger machines, but Ninja has somehow squeezed one into a footprint that's compact, without making the machine feel cramped to use.

Finally, I'd recommend it to aspiring home baristas. It still asks you to grind, dose, tamp and lock in the portafilter yourself, so you learn proper espresso technique, but the machine quietly manages the trickier variables (grind recommendations, extraction and milk texturing) so it's difficult to make a truly bad coffee.

Unboxing the Ninja Luxe Café Mini Plus Espresso Machine

Ninja continues to set the standard for packaging. Everything arrives securely protected with recyclable cardboard and moulded paper pulp rather than excessive plastic, and despite travelling through several couriers, every component arrived in immaculate condition.

Inside the box you'll find everything needed to get brewing immediately: the portafilter, single and double baskets, assisted tamper, dosing funnel, milk jug and cleaning accessories. The portafilter immediately stands out to me: I think it's a great way to gauge the quality of a coffee machine. And Ninja's doesn't disappoint. It has a reassuring weight that feels much closer to commercial equipment than you'd expect at this price point.

I also appreciate the amount of guidance Ninja builds into the setup. Protective stickers identify every component, there's a water hardness test strip for calibrating the machine correctly from day one, and several accessories tuck neatly into onboard storage, keeping the worktop surprisingly uncluttered.

What is the Ninja Luxe Café Mini Plus Espresso Machine like to use?

One thing Ninja consistently gets right is deciding where automation improves the coffee-making experience. Rather than removing you from the process altogether, the Luxe Café Mini Plus automates the variables that usually trip beginners up, while leaving the satisfying parts firmly in your hands.

You still grind fresh beans, distribute the coffee, tamp the puck and lock the portafilter into place just like you would on a traditional espresso machine. The difference is that Ninja recommends the ideal grind size and handles extraction with impressive consistency, dramatically reducing the chances of under-extracted sour shots or bitter over-extraction.

As someone who enjoys making coffee manually, I think this is exactly the right balance. You still feel like the barista, but without the steep learning curve.

The first drink I always make is a double espresso because it reveals almost everything about a machine's brewing performance. Good espresso should have a thick, hazelnut-coloured crema, balanced acidity and enough body to carry the flavour notes through every sip.

Using Lavazza beans that I know well, the Luxe Café Mini Plus produced an impressive, punchy shot. Extraction was even across the puck, with no obvious signs of channeling, and the resulting espresso showcased the beans' chocolate and roasted hazelnut notes beautifully. The crema was dense and long-lasting, suggesting excellent pressure and thorough extraction of the coffee oils.

I made 10 shots, back to back, and the machine kept consistent flavours, extraction, and quantity. For a machine aimed at home users, it's remarkably consistent.

One of the easiest ways to ruin good espresso is by adding boiling water. Excessive temperatures flatten the sweeter tasting notes and exaggerate bitterness, leaving an americano that tastes harsh rather than balanced.

Thankfully, Ninja gets their temperature regulation right. The water integrates gently with the espresso, preserving its sweetness while producing a lighter-bodied cup that's noticeably smoother than many bean-to-cup machines I've tested. The only minor criticism is that the water can splash slightly against the rear panel during dispensing, although it's easy enough to wipe clean afterwards.

Automatic steam wands often produce foam that's either too airy or too thin, but Ninja has clearly refined its system. During testing, it produced glossy microfoam with a paint-like consistency that's remarkably close to what you'd expect from a trained barista.

I tested whole milk alongside oat and soy alternatives across every texture setting, and each produced stable foam with excellent definition. Latte mode creates silky milk that's ideal for simple latte art, while cappuccino mode introduces just enough extra air without becoming dry or bubbly. The cold foam was also really delicious, creating dense, velvety foam that transformed iced lattes.

For experienced users, the wand can also be switched into manual mode by pulling it forwards, giving you complete control over milk texturing.

As an enthusiastic iced coffee drinker, I tried all of the cooler recipes, which are designed to be brewed over ice. If you did this with hot coffee, it would taste bitter and acidic, so this slight tweak can really help to keep all the delicious flavours from your beans, but for your iced drinks. The iced espresso surprised me the most, because it can be the most exposing colder coffee to make: iced lattes are sweetened by milk and iced filter coffee is mellow already. The iced espressos were surprisingly delicate. I could still taste the familiar flavours of hot coffee that's cooled (which is a little more acidic than cold brew), but these were much more mellow than you would get from any coffee shop, meaning it gets my wholehearted seal of approval.

Filter coffee might seem like an unusual choice for a UK market. It's popular in America and has been getting more attention across the pond recently, but for Ninja to dedicate space on their machine for classic, rich, and iced filter coffee must mean that it's exceptionally good. As someone who has drunk litres of filter coffee when I used to test machines for an American brand, I'm seriously impressed with the different options.

Classic filter coffee gets the mellow, simple flavours of this brewing style spot on. The rich filter coffee, is a more intense flavour that you can absolutely differentiate between: it's the dark chocolate to the milk chocolate of the classic brew. Finally, and very seasonally, the iced brew is a beautiful drink for warmer weather. It's delicate and light, perfect with a dash of coconut milk. All in all, the quality of the filter function could be enough to convert you.

Cleaning and maintaining the Ninja Luxe Café Mini Plus Espresso Machine

Cleaning the Ninja is low-maintenance. After each milk drink, the steam wand automatically purges itself, removing residual milk before it has a chance to bake onto the nozzle and clog up the pipes. It's a small touch, but one that dramatically reduces the daily upkeep that often puts people off espresso machines.

Ninja also includes thoughtful maintenance extras, including a water hardness testing strip, descaler and dedicated cleaning brushes. The drip tray and water tank all slide out easily for rinsing, and I was pleasantly surprised that the brushed stainless steel panels resisted fingerprints far better than many competitors.

How does the Ninja Luxe Café Mini Plus Espresso Machine compare?

The closest rival isn't actually another brand, it's Ninja's own Luxe Café range. The larger Luxe Café offers additional drink presets, more onboard storage and cold brew functionality, making it a better choice for households where coffee is a daily essential. However, unless you'll use those extra features, the Mini Plus delivers almost the same brewing experience in a significantly smaller footprint.

Its biggest external rival is Sage's Bambino Plus. While Sage remains one of my favourite espresso machines, the Bambino Plus requires a separate grinder, which ultimately occupies more counter space than Ninja's integrated solution. It also focuses almost exclusively on espresso, whereas Ninja broadens its appeal with filter coffee, iced drinks and far greater automation.

Should you buy the Ninja Luxe Café Mini Plus Espresso Machine?

After testing dozens of coffee machines over the past few years, I've found that compact models almost always ask you to compromise. They usually lose the grinder, simplify the milk system or strip back drink options to save space.

The Luxe Café Mini Plus manages to avoid almost all of those sacrifices. It delivers faultless filter coffee, excellent espresso, produces some of the best automatic milk texturing I've tested, and still gives you enough manual involvement to make brewing feel rewarding rather than robotic.

Its biggest limitation is the maximum 235ml drink size, which may disappoint anyone who prefers oversized mugs of coffee. I'd also miss the cold brew function from Ninja's larger Luxe Café models.

Otherwise, this is an impressively well-rounded machine. If you want café-quality coffee but don't have room for a full-sized setup, I think the Ninja Luxe Café Mini Plus is one of the strongest compact espresso machines you can currently buy.

How we test coffee machines

At woman&home, we have a standardised process for how we test coffee machines. As a former barista, I set the standard high with the flavours, consistency, and speed that I expect from a coffee machine. I always make sure to research a model before writing about it, to see what the brand says about it and what the special features are. Then, I pay close attention to these, as well as the basics, to see how well the coffee machine stands up to market leading models. I also look at how it compares, what it's like to clean, and anything else that you should know before you make a purchase. By the end of the review, you should know everything you need to know. However, if you want a deeper dive, you can visit our dedicated page for how we test coffee machines.

Blimey, it's hot. A phrase I'm sure all of us have uttered over the past couple of months. And with few of our homes offering the instant relief of air conditioning, the obvious solution is some sort of electric fan. But which one?

In my case, not the cheap 'lightbulb' fans that have been the menace of my TikTok feeds Whilst inexpensive handheld fans have their place, at home, you'll need something a bit more resilient. Something like the Dimplex DuoCool Smart Cordless 2-in-1 Fan.

It's certainly packed with features – it can convert from a tabletop to a freestanding in a few clicks; has a battery life of up to 45 hours; promises to be whisper quiet and can even be controlled by Alexa. But while the Dimplex DuoCool makes a good case for being one of the best cooling fans around, would it actually, ahem, blow us away?

Dimplex DuoCool Smart Cordless 2-in-1 Fan review

• RRP: £179.99
• Dimensions: H91.7cm x Dia36cm
• Weight: 4.9kg
• Power: 30W
• Speeds: 5 fan speeds plus Turbo
• Features: 60°/120°/180° oscillation; child lock; sleep timer; remote; cordless
• Warranty: 3-year guarantee

Unboxing the Dimplex DuoCool Smart Cordless 2-in-1 Fan

Given it's a floor-standing design, the Dimplex DuoCool arrived in a surprisingly small square box, just as you'd pick it up in store. As you can see, Dimplex are keen to highlight that three-year warranty and the fact the fan works with Amazon Alexa and Google Home.

Open up the box and everything is efficiently packaged, with cardboard dividers (yay!) and plastic bags (boo!) protecting the fan's surfaces. As regular readers of my reviews will know, I like my tech to be packaged in as eco-friendly a way as possible, so this was probably a 5/10, given the bags and lamination on the box. Plastics aside, this makes a good first impression.

The instructions are neatly rested on top, so it's very easy to get into the set-up of the fan straightaway. The main 'head' is very sleek and smooth in matt charcoal and black, and the carry handle sculpted into the back makes it very easy to lift out and carry.

I was momentarily confused as to where the short legs (for the fan in tabletop mode) were, but they were rather cleverly stowed in the fan base. As someone who couldn't tell you where half the attachments for her vacuum cleaner are, I thought this was a little bit genius, as it makes them far less likely to be lost.

Once you've located the parts, and with the instructions to hand, assembly was quick and straightforward. I started using the fan on its stand, which you attach by lowering the fan head down into the stand and clicking it in place.

To remove it, simply press the release button on the top of the base and pull. It's very easy and didn't ever seem to stick or jam. To remove the short legs from the stand (these come it two parts), push them inward and they'll spring out. Then you'll need to line up the two semicircles to click them into the fan. Again, it's super simple, and it doesn't take too much strength to remove them.

To control the fan, there are four options – on-fan buttons, a standalone remote, the GlenDimplex Connect app and voice controls through Amazon Alexa or Google Home. Of course, we tried all four during the course of the testing.

Who would the Dimplex DuoCool Smart Cordless 2-in-1 Fan suit?

As the Dimplex is a two-in-one wireless fan, I'd say it's a good buy for someone looking for a versatile model that they plan to move from room to room, or even into the garden. So if you live in a milder climate that suffers the occasional heatwave, or if you have aircon in your main bedroom but want a fan you can use in other areas of the house to stay cool, it's a wise option.

Also, because it's wireless, you can take it out to the garden, or perhaps even on a camping trip. As tents have a tendency to get super-hot inside, I can see the DuoCool offering a lot of relief on warm days. And you could even charge it in the car via the USB-C cable and a relevant 5V adaptor.

Finally, there's a strong case for buying the fan if you have mobility or dexterity issues. it is surprisingly lightweight given its size, but even better, you can control it via your voice, so there's no fiddling around with pesky buttons or leaving that comfy chair.

At this point, it's a good time to reveal that. had a little help in testing this fan. After using it myself for a couple of weeks, I handed it over to my sister-in-law Claire, who suffers from Multiple Sclerosis.

Claire, like many diagnosed with MS, finds it more difficult to regulate her body temperature and suffers from heat sensitivity, which can exacerbate symptoms like fatigue. So she was eager to test the fan through the heatwave.

Another thing to know about Claire is that she (unlike me, who has been known to sleep through fire alarms and an actual earthquake) can be woken by the sound of a pin dropping. So the quieter the fan, the better for her. And as we'll see, the DuoCool really delivers on that front for keeping your bedroom cool.

What is the Dimplex DuoCool Smart Cordless 2-in-1 Fan like to use?

Let's start with the out-of-the-box experience. Once I'd attach the fan to the stand, I first tried controlling it with three buttons on the fan head – one each for the timer, power level/on/off and angle of oscillation. A gentle tap will scroll through the options. In general, I found these easy to use and not so sensitive that you'd miss your chosen setting by scrolling too fast.

The timer button is one that you'll need to get your head around, as there are actually 6 different onboard options – from 1 hour to 7 hours. As you cycle through, combinations of the LED indicators will light up, for example 1hr + 2hr for a three-hour timer, or 2hr + 4hr for a six hour timer.

The oscillation options are simpler as there just three, each with their own LED indicator: 60°, 120°, or 180°.

There are six power levels in total (1 to 5 plus a Turbo options) and one of the first things that struck me is how quiet the fan is in modes 1 and 2. Claire was able to sleep soundly through the night with the fan on these settings, while I was undisturbed up to level 3.

I took dB readings for each of the settings for reference in a quiet bedroom with no road or other noises to disturb the results:

As you can see there is a big jump in noise output from settings 3 to 4, which correlates with an increase in wind speed. By day, we typically used the fan in modes 3 or 5. Only on the very hottest days (36 degrees C), did we put the the fan into turbo mode, but as it's quite noisy, we found mode 5 to be a better compromise.

Using the remote and the app

The Dimplex DuoCool comes with a battery-powered remote, which works well enough. it is, however, quite diddy, which means that if you're prone to losing things, you might be better off sticking with the app.

The remote does pretty much what the onboard buttons do – cycle through speeds, oscillation and timer settings, turn the fan on and off completely, and set the child lock. But obviously it's very useful if you don't want to move from your chair or bed!

The app, on the other hand, unlocks a few more smart features – and as it's free, it's well worth downloading. Called GlenDimplex Connect, it's available for iOS and Android.

As you can see from the above screen grabs, the app allows you to do everything you can with the remote, and more.

You can schedule the fan to come on and off at more specific times, turn the fan's onboard LED displays off, see the fan's precise remaining battery power and set it up to work with any Amazon Alexa or Google Home device on your home WiFi network.

You can even give the fan a nickname (we chose Jeff). We could then, via Alexa, ask Jeff to change its speed and oscillation settings, set timers and activate the child lock without lifting a finger.

There is just one downside to the app, and that's that you can only pair one smartphone to the fan at any one time. But using a smart assistant like Alexa opens control up to the whole household, so it's hardly a dealbreaker.

Battery life

Next, a quick word on battery life. On its website, Dimplex states the fully charged fan has 'up to 45 hours battery life' that 'covers several days of standard use on one charge'.

In reality on a hot summer's day with the fan in continuous use on settings ranging from 5 at some parts of the day to 1 overnight, it lasted just over 24 hours on a full charge.

I think the 45 hour charge time might be accurate if the fan were used for a few hours at a time with breaks, and on a low setting of 1-2 only. Or perhaps on level 1 continuously but with no oscillation.

Dimplex also states the battery can take up to six hours to charge. We observed that it seemed to charge more quickly, taking around four hours.

Cleaning the Dimplex DuoCool Smart Cordless 2-in-1 Fan

As long-term fan owners know, getting dust out of those caged fan blades can be pretty tricky – and not doing so will result in a nasty burning smell when you switch the fan on after a long break.

So one feature both myself and the in-laws appreciated was the fan's protective cover, which pulls tight around the head of the fan with a drawstring. It might not get much use in the middle of summer, but it'll come into its own when the fan is packed away for winter, helping keep the dust at bay.

Dimplex recommends clean the fan every six months or as needed to prevent any malfunctions, and suggests unplugging it and activating the child lock mode to prevent any accidental power-on.

To clean the air vents and front grille, Dimplex says to use a vacuum cleaner, and then wipe the other surfaces with a cloth moistened slightly with water and a little mild detergent like washing-up liquid.

As we've only been testing the fan for a couple of months and it's been in use pretty much every day, we've not really had to deal with any internal dust build-up as yet, though I would say the black finish does mean that attract dust and I've had to give it a few wipe downs. I tend to use a damp microfibre cloth, occasionally with a squirt of Purdy & Figg essential oil cleaner.

Should you buy the Dimplex DuoCool Smart Cordless 2-in-1 Fan?

In my opinion, you'd be silly not to buy the Dimplex DuoCool. This is hands down the best standard fan I've tested, thanks to its whisper-quiet operation, powerful and even airflow and impressive 24-hours-plus battery life.

With an RRP of £179.99, it's competitively priced, especially considering the three-year warranty. Another standout feature is its portability. Thanks to the rechargeable battery and carry handle, it's easy to move from room to room, or even take outside,without hunting for a plug socket. But where the DuoCool really excels is in the bedroom. It's quiet enough to sleep with on settings one or two, and the built-in timer means it can switch itself off once you've drifted off.

My sister-in-law Claire has become so attached to it that she describes herself as "the number-one fan of the fan". So if you struggle to regulate your body temperature, experience hot flushes during the menopause or simply dread sticky summer nights, the DuoCool is an investment that's well worth making.

The soaring temperatures in recent weeks have made dressing for anything - let alone exercise - feel very difficult. I normally reach for my trainers, but when packing for a recent trip to Wales, I quickly saw that wasn't going to be an option. One day was going to reach above 32 degrees. So, I dug out my Keen Newport H2s, a favourite pair of hiking sandals.

These slip-on sandals deliver all the convenience and breathability you want from a sandal, with a chunky rubber outsole and protective upper that are reliable on rough trails. The EVA foam midsole is flexible and supportive enough to be comfortable all day.

I like these hiking sandals so much that I even bought a pair for my partner this year, and he's barely taken them off since. They've got a more utilitarian look than some sandals, and they're not featherlight. But if you're looking for one pair of shoes for days out and active holidays, or even just for staying cool in the city with a gorpcore-inspired look - this is the pair I'd recommend.

Keen Newport H2 review

Specifications

• Size range: 2.5 - 8.5
• Weight: 330g per shoe
• Upper materials: Polyester webbing
• Sole: Subber outsole, EVA midsole

What are the Keen Newport H2s like to walk in?

Keen released the first edition of the Newport hiking sandal back in 2003, but I didn't try them out until the revamped H2 came out a couple of summers ago, and I was instantly impressed by their comfort and protection.

Unlike most sandals, the midsole is cushioned enough to keep my feet feeling great after hours of wear, and its flexible design lends the shoes a more natural feel. The Newports have all the arch support I need to stop me from over-pronating, and I get a nice, smooth walking feel.

I was a little apprehensive about hiking in sandals, but the rubber sole actually looks like it belongs on a sturdier hiking shoe, and it gives me all the traction I need on roads, pavement, and straightforward trails. I also put these sandals to the test recently on some steep sections of crumbly trails in South Wales, and as long as I was careful, I had no issues.

Where they really shine is on long walks from forest to beach, where I can easily shake out the sand and even cross streams and paddle in the sea without taking them off.

The bungee cord design isn't just easy – it secures the shoes nicely around my heel and midfoot, leaving plenty of room for my toes. I also love how easy it is to tuck the toggle away so it doesn't get caught up in the grass.

Speaking of toes, you'd be forgiven for worrying that sandals won't protect your feet from trail hazards like rocks and tree roots, but the rubber toe acts like a car bumper, and I've never had any painful meetings with hidden objects.

The uppers are stretchy and as breathable as you'd expect, and when I do wear them in the water, they drain easily and dry quickly without rubbing. In fact, the only time I've experienced any rubbing was on one toe after I wore them for a 16k coastal walk. I think for future long walks I might commit the ultimate faux pas and pair them with socks.

For the most part, I do, of course, wear them without socks, but they're treated with anti-odour, and even after several summers, they're still not smelly.

I only occasionally pick up a pebble, and when I do, it only takes a second to slip them off, dump out any debris and then I'm walking again.

Who are the Keen Newport H2s made for?

You can do everything but run in these shoes. You'll need a pair of trail running shoes for that. They're built for anyone who wants to spend summer outdoors, whether that's on the trail, at festivals or in the water. They might not be the best choice for true mountain hikes or very long walks, but for anything up to about 10k, you'll be comfortable in these supportive sandals.

They're perfect for active holidays where you want to walk, hit the beach and paddle without packing three different pairs of shoes. If you're going camping with your family, you won't even need to bring camp shoes, and they're the perfect easy solution for midnight trips from the tent to the toilet block.

The design is more function than fashion, so they're perhaps not ideal if you're looking for something you can also wear with a cute sundress. If you want something just a little prettier, I'm also a huge fan of the Keen Elle Backstrap sandals, which are surprisingly comfortable for hiking. The Teva Hurricane Drift, as seen on Helen Skeleton recently, are another low-key option.

With lots of hot weather ahead, I plan on leaving my socks rolled up in my top drawer, my hiking boots by the front door, and feeling the breeze between my toes in these sandals.

The w&h verdict

I'd recommend the Keen Newport H2 to anyone on the hunt for a hiking sandal that really provides both comfort and protection. The cushy sole and breathable upper make them perfect for hot summer days, but I can take them on rough trails with confidence.

I've worn these shoes from bog to beach, in mountain streams and for fun music festivals. I've put in many miles wearing them on the trails, and I am constantly impressed by their versatility, comfort and grip.

They're not the cheapest hiking sandals out there, but they are a little easier on the wallet than the Keen Hyperports, and they give you more toe coverage than others. This also makes them a good option as a daily trainer alternative in the summer months.

I do wish they came in more vibrant colours, and they aren't the most stylish option, but navy blue is smart, goes with most other colours, and doesn't show the dirt. Even after several summers, they still look pretty good.

First, a confession. Since my decade-old stick blender gave up the ghost two years ago, I haven't replaced it. Instead, I've been wowed by premium countertop blenders like the Ninja Foodi and Sage Super Q, teaming them up with my favourite kitchen appliance of all time – my 25-year-old KitchenAid stand mixer.

So when I I had the opportunity to test out Dualit's 700W hand blender, I was more than willing, but sceptical that it would stand up to my impressive jug and bullet blenders. Surely countertop appliances have most jobs covered?

But *spoiler alert* I was wrong. Because what this mini machine lacks in terms of power and pizazz, it more than makes up for in convenience and usability. It's certainly worthy of a spot in our roundup of the best hand blenders.

Dualit 700W Hand Blender review

• RRP: £99.99
• Dimensions: H37.8cm x W6.4cm x D12.6cm
• Weight: 2.24kg
• Power: 700W / 220-240V
• Speed: Variable dial + Turbo boost
• Cable length: 1.24m
• Warranty: 1-year guarantee

Unboxing the Dualit 700W Hand Blender

My Dualit blender arrived in a cardboard outer packaging, with the cardboard box within. The blender and its accessories are very efficiently and ecologically packaged, which gets a good score for us, as many hand blenders come with non-recyclable packaging.

Everything is held in place with sturdy cardboard 'shells' and wrapped in tissue paper to protect the surfaces from scratches. The bladed parts (the wand and chopper bowl) have plastic covers to protect the sharp edges, so care needs to be taken to remove them. They are easy to miss, so make sure you check, otherwise you may end up blending them into your food...

A 36-page instruction booklet explains what the various attachments do and how to use them, which parts are dishwasher safe (more on that later), and a useful maximum loading chart, so you don't overwhelm the blender.

It also features a selection of 20 recipes, which I found to be a good jumping-off point for testing the blender. They range from simple smoothies and soups to pancakes, guacamole, pâté and satay sauce.

The blender mostly struck me as great quality: the jug and chopper bowl are made from sturdy plastic and the stainless-steel blender wand feels very premium.

The main body and gearbox are a little plasticky and they do tend to show up fingerprints quite quickly, but they're far from cheap or ugly. Only the whisk struck me as flimsy, though that didn't seem to affect its performance, as we shall see.

Who would the Dualit 700W Hand Blender suit?

Dualit pitches its hand blender as 'a flexible kitchen assistant' that can do most prep jobs. I'd say it's perfect for anyone who wants to elevate their culinary skills by preparing their own pestos mayonnaise, and sauces. It's also a great little blitzer for onions, garlic or breadcrumbs, and can mix up smoothies and soups with ease.

One of my favourite things about the Dualit is its neat size. The blender main body, wand gearbox and whisk will all fit in a shallow kitchen drawer, and the chopper and jug could be easily squeezed into a cupboard, making this a handy tool if you don't have ample countertop space for a countertop appliance.

In short, if you're an enthusiastic home cook with limited space, who wants more than an entry-level appliance but doesn't have hundreds to spend, the Dualit hand blender makes a lot of sense.

At £99.99, the Dualit hand blender sits somewhere in the middle of the stick blender market. It's a little more than similar corded models with comparable attachments from Kenwood and Braun, but cheaper than offerings from Ninja and KitchenAid.

What's the Dualit 700W Hand Blender like to use?

To test all of the Dualit stick blender's capabilities, I made a few standards tests - meringues and mayonnaise – and also took inspiration from the recipe book, mixing up an adapted mackerel pâté and some satay sauce.

Testing the whisk attachment

Fluffy meringue was the first challenge. This would require a combination of the gearbox, which twists and locks into place, and the whisk that’s attached simply by pushing it up into the body of the gearbox. You’ll hear a click when it’s locked in. Dualit recommends you mix no more than four egg whites at a time (I went for three), and whle you can use the tall jug provided, decided to use a glass bowl as I find meringues don't whip up as well in plastic containers.

I started the blender off at a low speed, gradually upping the rate by rolling the variable speed dial on the body of the machine. You do need to be careful not to roll it too quickly though – at higher speeds the meringue started to splash quite a bit and there was no need for the turbo function.

In less than two minutes, the egg whites were whipped up enough to start adding caster sugar, and my meringue mix was ready in less than five minutes. The meringues produced were the perfect combination of fluffy and chewy. So far, so successful.

Removing the whisk afterwards was equally straightforward – I simply grabbed it by the neck and gave it a firm tug. There is one lesson I learned the hard way, though, and that's not to use the whisk attachment on turbo speed. In a moment of impatience, I decided to give it a go and was immediately greeted by a faint burning smell.

Thankfully, no lasting damage appears to have been done, but I suspect repeated turbo-whisking would eventually take its toll on the gearbox and motor, so it's best to save the turbo button for jobs that actually need it.

Testing the chopper bowl and knife blade

Next, I decided to give the blender a more demanding test by making a smoked mackerel pâté using the chopper attachment and blending wand. I loosely followed the salmon pâté recipe in the booklet, simply swapping salmon for smoked mackerel and parsley for dill.

I started by adding large chunks of mackerel fillet to the chopper bowl before locking the blender body and gearbox onto the top. Using the turbo setting, I pulsed the fish until it formed a fine, flaky mixture. It made light work of the job, and the rubber ring around the base of the bowl kept it firmly – and reassuringly – planted on the worktop.

Testing the blender wand

Chopping complete, I transferred the mackerel to a plastic mixing bowl and added cream cheese, spring onion, Worcestershire sauce, roughly torn parsley and the juice of half a lime. It was then time to swap the chopper attachment for the blending wand.

While removing the gearbox was straightforward, attaching the wand took more effort than I expected. It was initially very stiff and needed a firm twist before it finally clicked into place. If you have limited grip strength or problems with your hands or wrists, this could prove tricky.

Once attached, though, the blender felt good and sturdy. The pâté was more of a workout for the blending stick than the fish had been for the chopper, and I did have to stop once to scrape the mixture away from the blades. After a couple of minutes, however, everything was smooth and well combined, and I was impressed by how thoroughly it incorporated the parsley and spring onion without leaving noticeable chunks behind.

And the taste? Delicious. So kudos to Dualit for offering some strong recipes that truly deliver. There was one big issue with the wand, however and that was trying to remove it. I really struggled. I had to get my hubby to release it on the first use, and it's remained stiff and tough after half a dozen uses. I do think it wlll loosen over time, but it's something to be aware of.

Cleaning the Dualit 700W Hand Blender

No matter how good a kitchen gadget is, the real test comes when it's time to clean it. Nobody wants to spend five minutes making a smoothie only to spend 20 minutes scrubbing blender parts afterwards.

Thankfully, Dualit seems to understand this. I was pleasantly surprised to find a dedicated cleaning guide in the manual, detailing exactly how to care for each component. Better still, only two parts aren't dishwasher safe: the main motor unit and the gearbox. Both simply need a quick wipe with a damp cloth followed by a dry one. Their shiny silver finish does attract fingerprints, but it also cleans up easily and never seemed to hold onto food splatters. As this isn't an appliance destined to live permanently on display, I don't see that as a major drawback.

Everything else – the blending wand, whisk, chopper blade, chopper bowl and jug – can go straight into the dishwasher. Dualit recommends using a cycle below 40°C or washing the parts by hand under running water. As someone who generally runs their dishwasher at 50°C, I wasn't quite disciplined enough to follow those instructions to the letter, but I'm pleased to report that everything emerged looking spotless.

The clear plastic components came out free from cloudy watermarks, while the metal wand and blades went from caked in ingredients to box fresh. And, perhaps most importantly, I didn't have to wrestle with a sponge and alarmingly sharp blades, which was a big safety win in my book.

Should I buy the Dualit 700W Hand Blender?

Using the Dualit 700W Hand Blender reminded me just how indispensable a good stick blender can be. It may not be the most glamorous appliance in the kitchen, but when you need one, nothing else quite does the job as quickly or conveniently.

It's become my go-to tool for blending soups directly in the pan – a task that's far less stressful than attempting to transfer litres of hot liquid into a jug blender. I also found myself reaching for the chopper attachment far more often than expected. It made quick work of onions and garlic, produced an excellent homemade pesto and a delicious satay (another delicious recipe courtesy of the instruction booklet).

I did find the whisk up to the task despite my initial misgivings about its flimsiness, though the turbo function is something to be avoided there. I will be honest and say I'd probably still rely on my KitchenAid for whipping cream, meringues and cake batters. However, if you don't have space for a stand mixer, I'd say this is a great option.

Overall, I'd happily recommend the Dualit to you. It's smart-looking, thoughtfully designed, easy to clean and simple to store. The chopper bowl is the standout attachment for me and the one I've continued to use most often. And if you can find it on offer for around £80, even better – that's a lot of versatility for not a lot of cupboard space.

How we test blenders

At woman&home, we test every blender that we recommend to you by hand. This means that all of our observations come as a result of in-person, hands-on experience, reflective of the kinds of jobs you'd be doing in your own kitchen. We make sure to cover all blender attachments, so that you can see how versatile an appliance is, but we also talk about what it's like to hold and clean as well as whether it's good value for money. In short, our review should answer every question that you have on whether the blender suits you. If you want to find out more, you can visit our dedicated page for how we test blenders.

It's official: KitchenAid's sell-out walnut wooden bowl is back. This time, it's paired with a soft porcelain finish on the brand's best-selling Artisan design. In my opinion, it's one of the most elegant models KitchenAid has added to its permanent collection.

If you recognise the walnut wood bowl, that's because it was the star of KitchenAid's limited-edition Evergreen Stand Mixer two years ago. The warm walnut finish quickly became one of the brand's most coveted details, bringing organic textures to the kitchen on top of the performance that has secured KitchenAid's place as the nation's favourite stand mixer.

However, when the Evergreen sold out, the bowl disappeared too. And you can ask anyone close to me, I haven't stopped talking about it since. Which is why this latest launch is so exciting. It combines the Artisan design I already love with the walnut wood bowl I thought I'd missed out on forever. I've even had the chance to put it to the test myself.

KitchenAid Artisan Stand Mixer with Walnut Bowl review

You'll spot in the specifications that this is almost identical to the Artisan. It comes with all the same accessories as the normal range, but with the addition of the walnut wood bowl:

Who would the KitchenAid Artisan Stand Mixer with Walnut Bowl suit?

• Aesthetic-driven bakers and design enthusiasts - the walnut wood bowl makes a stunning kitchen statement
• Bread bakers and artisan recipes - the walnut wood bowl has been praised for how well it creates a natural non-stick for bread doughs
• Slow bakers and careful cleaners - the bowl needs to be hand washed (and even oiled on occasion), so suits bakers who don't mind a little maintenance

KitchenAid stand mixers have long been loved by serious bakers. There's no denying that they strike an iconic silhouette on the counter, which is only enhanced by the striking wooden bowl. I have mine in a modern kitchen, but I could imagine it making a beautiful statement in a cosy cottage or farmhouse kitchen.

KitchenAid stand mixers have become famous for good reason. They're the model that the Great British Bake Off uses, because they work well across a range of functions. The walnut wood bowl has had some specific praise for its natural non-stick which is brilliant if you make stickier loaves, such as sourdough, brioche, and focaccia.

There are a few maintenance notes to account for though. Unlike KitchenAid's stainless steel bowls, this cannot go in the dishwasher, so needs to be carefully washed by hand and occasionally oiled to keep the wood in good condition. Also, as a wooden item, it can't be put in the freezer before whipping cream or egg whites, so isn't perfect for cold baking enthusiasts.

What is the KitchenAid Artisan Stand Mixer with Walnut Bowl like to use?

I've tested several versions of the KitchenAid Artisan Stand Mixer over the years, and they've consistently impressed me with their combination of power, style and reliability. This latest edition, with its walnut wooden bowl, brings something slightly different to the range: a warmer, more tactile design that feels made to sit proudly on a kitchen worktop.

My typical stand mixer tests cover everything I would expect a keen baker to make at home: bread (including both a classic white loaf and sourdough), cake batter, cookie dough and whipped cream. These recipes allow me to test the full capabilities of the mixer, from the strength of the motor and stability of the bowl to how evenly each attachment works. They also give me a chance to assess how practical the KitchenAid accessories are in everyday use.

As expected, this KitchenAid sailed through my tests. The first thing I noticed was how smoothly dough released from the wooden bowl. When making focaccia, I found it easy to lift the dough away from the sides without needing to scrape stubborn patches out with a spatula. I noticed the same with cookie dough, which can often cling to the sides of a mixer bowl and make transferring the mixture more frustrating. Here, the smoother finish made the process noticeably easier.

Whipping cream was equally impressive, with the whisk attachment creating a light, even texture in a short amount of time. One thing worth noting, however, is that the wooden bowl can't be chilled before use. Unlike a stainless steel bowl, wood is an insulating natural material, so if you're someone who likes to pop your bowl in the freezer before whipping cream, this isn't the model for you.

The lack of a handle was the biggest practical difference I noticed during testing. When scraping out the last of my mixtures, I found myself wishing I had something to grip while holding a spatula in the other hand. It wasn't a dealbreaker, especially because the bowl isn't particularly heavy to manoeuvre, but it is something to consider if you're used to the convenience of a handled mixer bowl.

For cakes and cookies, I used the standard beater attachment, and both mixtures were combined thoroughly. The attachment reached right down to the bottom of the bowl, leaving no pockets of unmixed flour behind. I was initially cautious about using chocolate and richer ingredients against the wooden surface, but the bowl felt robust throughout testing.

Like any wooden kitchenware, it does require slightly more consideration than stainless steel. While it feels durable, wood can absorb oils over time, so I would avoid using it regularly for particularly greasy mixtures or heavily spiced batters that could affect the appearance of the finish. For everyday baking, though, it adds a beautiful, natural element to the KitchenAid experience while still delivering the performance you'd expect from the Artisan range.

Should you buy the KitchenAid Artisan Stand Mixer with Walnut Bowl?

The KitchenAid Artisan Wooden Bowl Stand Mixer is a beautiful example of how a practical kitchen appliance can also become a design feature. Throughout testing, it delivered the same impressive performance I've come to expect from the Artisan range, handling everything from bread dough to delicate whipped cream with ease.

The wooden bowl does come with a few considerations. It isn't quite as practical as stainless steel for every baking task, particularly if you regularly work with oily mixtures or rely on chilled bowls for whipping cream. However, for everyday baking, the smooth finish, easy release and warm walnut design make it a genuinely special addition to the kitchen.

If you're already a KitchenAid fan and want a stand mixer that makes a statement , this is one of the most elegant versions I've tested. It combines the reliability of the Artisan range with a unique material choice that makes even simple baking feel a little more special.

As pruning is such an essential gardening task, having the best tools to tackle the job is a must. And while a professional set of standard secateurs is perfectly sufficient to prune with precision, what could be better than a power-assisted pair that takes the strain out of repeatedly clamping down on the handles with force?

That's where the new Bosch EasyPrune power-assisted gardening tool takes the lead, protecting your wrists and hands by relieving the pressure required when pruning even the toughest branches.

I've been using this smart pair of secateurs to cut through everything from the thick woody stems on a dying ivy bush and bay tree to pruning tomato plant stems. It has proved it's a worthy contender for any essential gardening tool kit.

Bosch EasyPrune Cordless Garden Secateurs review

Who would they suit?

These power-assisted secateurs would suit several different gardeners. Firstly, they are perfect for those who need to ease the strain on their hands, for instance those with joint discomfort and hand muscle issues.

Secondly, they are ideal for those who love power tools and enjoy the ease of working with a battery-assisted gadget. And generally for anyone who enjoys gardening but would rather tackle routine tasks with ease. Perhaps someone who had a once manageable plot that now feels overwhelming and too much upkeep?

Bosch recommends using the secateurs for small and medium-sized pruning jobs, so while they will help cut through plants that regular secateurs can't, they are not suitable for heavy-duty pruning such as your best potted trees.

What are the Bosch EasyPrune Secateurs like to use?

Firstly, they are super easy to use. I know sometimes when things are 'smart' they can feel like they might be complicated. The USB port makes it easy to charge (the cable is included but without a plug adaptor), within an hour.

Once fully charged, you are good to go. It says you get approximately 450 cuts per charge, but it felt like more than that after a morning of hearty pruning (I must confess, I didn't actually count – but it was a lot).

If you have fast-growing shrubs in your garden, you'll know how unruly they can get if left untended – particularly those with woody stems. These secateurs can cut through branches of 20mm hardwood and 25mm softwood, with no effort from you at all.

I did find that on particularly thick branches it took several attempts to cut through, but it still got the job done without me having to apply force.

With sizeable stainless steel blades and automatic power-assist technology which intuitively kicks in once resistance is detected, this tool really is smart garden gadget that can transform the way you prune.

Even if you don't struggle with hand strain, a long day of gardening can wreak havoc on your wrists and fingers; this will reduce the risk of that strain and make gardening easier and more enjoyable again.

Probably the biggest test for these cordless garden secateurs was tending to a dying ivy bush that is now mostly woody roots and branches that need to be completely cut back. Full disclosure, I've been putting the job off because I was dreading how hard it would be for my poor hands, as each cut would require pressure. Since using the new Bosch EasyPrune battery-powered secateurs, I was actually looking forward to getting to work on it. And I wasn't disappointed.

Because of its capabilities to cut through 20 mm of hardwood, the majority was as easy as trimming a single flower stem. There were a few thicker branches, but I simply had to repeat the cut twice to get through the tough stem. There's no doubt that this is where this smart pair of secateurs excels.

This image below perfectly demonstrates what size of stem the tool intuitively knows to cut – it didn't engage when cutting the smaller branch of my rose bush. But for the more substantial branch, it automatically cut through with power. This smart approach preserves battery life because it only engages the power-assist when you genuinely need it.

It's worth noting what it's like to use in terms of how it feels when it cuts. For the most part, it operates as a manual pair of secateurs and cuts in manual mode. When a certain branch diameter is reached, it automatically starts power-assisted mode by starting the integrated motor.

This emits a small vibration and a short mechanical-type noise. The sound pressure level of the product is less than 70db, so there is absolutely no danger of it upsetting the neighbours in the same way as a leaf blower would.

How do they compare to standard secateurs?

There are several ways to draw comparisons. The first is the price. Obviously, the EasyPrune is more expensive than even the most sophisticated professional secateurs, but they are a power tool, so that is to be expected. In terms of what they can do and how easy they make pruning, I would say they are worth investing in.

The next comparison is the weight and size. They are much bigger than secateurs I've ever owned or worked with, which for some might not be as appealing. The battery makes these secateurs slightly more weighty, but not so heavy that they are problematic to use.

They are most notably heavier than standard plastic alternatives. Compared to an old (very old) pair of Kent & Stowe hardwood and carbon steel secateurs, they don't feel overly heavy. So, in short, they are not significantly heavier than a quality standard set of secateurs.

The last, but not least, element to compare is how they perform. When it comes to cutting through stems and branches, there is simply no comparison. They effortlessly glide through thicker branches. And with slender stems that don't activate the power-assisted mode, they cut in the same manner as a regular pruning tool.

Cleaning the Bosch EasyPrune Secateurs

As with any garden secateurs, you should always take care when cleaning the blades. The instruction manual says to keep the tool away from water and moisture, so the best approach for cleaning is to simply wipe with a microfibre cloth after each use – always wearing gloves to protect your hands.

The upper blade is replaceable, and the helpful user manual that accompanies the tool provides clear instructions to help if you ever need to do so further down the line.

Should you buy the Bosch EasyPrune Cordless Garden Secateurs?

Whether cutting back a dense hedgerow, shaping foliage or pruning roses to maximise blooms, using a standard pair of secateurs can lead to aches and discomfort after repetitive strain. This power-assisted pair would suit anyone who wants to make the job easier.

They are an investment, with an RRP of £92, but they are rechargeable, and the main blade is replaceable, ensuring they last for years to come.

You should buy the Bosch EasyPrune tool if you want to reduce the effort involved in any pruning task.

Safety notices in the user manual: If no force is exerted onto the handles the tool stops. Protect the power tool against heat, e.g against continuous intense sunlight, fire, water and moisture.

At woman&home, we take pride in knowing exactly what makes a great night’s sleep, especially when it comes to staying cool. So when we started seeing impressive feedback about the Evermore 1500 Pocket Spring Foam Hybrid Mattress, we were intrigued. Promising breathable comfort, pressure-relieving support and a luxurious feel, we put it to the test in the real world to see whether it could deliver on those claims.

Like many of the best cooling mattresses, the Evermore combines pocket springs with layers of foam to create a balance of support and comfort. It also uses temperature-regulating materials designed to help dissipate heat, so you can enjoy a cooler night's sleep without relying on a fan running at full blast.

But cooling is only one part of a good mattress. The Evermore’s supportive construction is designed to provide a comfortable sleeping surface for a range of sleepers, including those who need extra cushioning around pressure points. So, could this newer mattress be the secret to deeper, more restorative sleep?

Evermore 1500 Pocket Spring Foam Hybrid Mattress review

• RRP: £479
• Warranty: Five years
• Sizes: Single, Small Double, Double, King size, Super King size
• Filling: Pocket Spring, reflex foam layer, Aurora Gel performance layer, quilted top
• Comfort: Medium-firm
• Thickness: 28cm
• Trial Period: N/A

How we test mattresses

Before you find out all about what we found when testing this mattress, it helps to know a little bit more about the person who tested it, Linda. She's part of our Tester Network where readers, like you, test products for us.

Who would the Evermore 1500 Pocket Spring Foam Hybrid Mattress suit?

• Hot sleepers - the open structure and specialised gel layer offer as much temperature regulation as a hybrid mattress can
• Front and back sleepers - thanks to the even layer of responsive springs and foam that contour to the body
• People with back or joint pain - the foam offers impressive pressure relief and tailored support

One of the reasons we wanted to test this mattress was its reputation amongst hot sleepers. The Aurora Gel performance layer is specifically designed to offer temperature control and airflow underneath you. Unlike many mattresses that use foam, it doesn't trap your body heat by your skin, reducing the clammy feeling that plenty of hot sleepers struggle with. We will go into the details later, but Linda was happy to report that she found the mattress "very cool to sleep on and I'm well into menopause."

The mattress is also sold as the perfect option for back sleepers and front sleepers as well as anyone struggling with back pain and joint issues. This boils down to the supportive elements inside the mattress, which comprise of 1,500 springs, which operate independently, offering each part of your body a tailored amount of resistance. There's also a reflex foam layer, which is said to follow and support spinal curvature carefully.

Evermore 1500 Pocket Spring Foam Hybrid Mattress Composition

Quilted top - said to offer ‘luxuriously plush cushioning for better sleep’. It definitely does this, you do feel like you’re sinking into a cloud when you lay down.

Aurora Gel performance layer - said to give ‘temperature control and optimal ventilation’. It is very cool to sleep on (and I’m a hot sleeper/menopausal).

‘A layer of reflex foam technology encourages your spine into a healthy alignment’. I didn’t notice any pain in my spine (or anywhere). It feels very supportive.

‘The fibre comfort layer makes it extra snug to sleep on’. I did feel like I was sinking into a very snug mattress (but it didn’t feel saggy!).

Adaptive 1500 pocket springs technology adjust to your movement for motion isolation - I think so (but it was a single so I didn’t share it with anyone, so I can’t be 100% sure).

Unboxing the Evermore 1500 Pocket Spring Foam Hybrid Mattress

It's always helpful to have notice before your mattress arrives. Whilst they've certainly come a long way, they aren't quite at the stage where you could pop one through your letterbox just yet.

As a hybrid mattress, it's harder to squeeze this into a box, because you're dealing with springs as well as foam. Therefore, Linda wasn't entirely surprised when this appeared at her door wrapped in a minimal amount of packaging, but still full-sized. "You'll need two people to move it," she says, "but the delivery team were really polite, friendly, and helpful. They even offered to carry it up the stairs." We'd always recommend having your strong arms at the ready, just in case delivery drivers are in a hurry, but the general feedback online seems to reflect Linda's experience.

Once Linda had taken the plastic off the mattress, she noticed a "new" smell, but not any of the chemical off-gassing that some hybrid and foam mattresses come with. The scent had dissipated within a few hours and Evermore don't leave any notes for letting your mattress rest before sleeping on it, so it's safe to assume that this is a mattress that arrives ready to go.

What is the Evermore 1500 Pocket Spring Foam Hybrid Mattress like to sleep on?

The first thing you'll notice about the Evermore mattress is its depth. At 28cm tall, this is a substantial hybrid mattress with multiple layers designed to balance comfort and support. The extra height often translates as the brand making more room for comfort layers on top of supportive springs underneath. Unsurprisingly, that’s exactly what gives the Evermore its luxurious, sink-in feel without losing structure. There are layers dedicated to different elements of comfort, all of which pay off.

Our tester Linda described the experience as “a bit like lying on a cloud”, and from looking at the composition, it's easy to see why. This is a mattress that immediately feels inviting: soft enough to let your body relax into it, but with enough resistance underneath to stop you feeling swallowed. She rated the firmness as medium, describing it as “soft yet supportive” and “just right”, with the feel staying consistent throughout the night.

This is rare for many mattresses, including hybrids. Balancing foam and springs can be tricky: too much foam and softer mattresses can lack support, while firmer designs can leave you feeling like you’re sleeping on top of the bed rather than in it. The Evermore sits comfortably between the two, offering that luxurious cushioning you’d expect from a premium mattress while still keeping your body supported.

Linda was particularly impressed by how restorative her sleep felt. “It felt hotel quality without the price tag,” she said, adding that she experienced a “very deep, undisturbed sleep” and woke up feeling well rested. She compared the experience to staying in a luxury hotel, with the mattress creating that immediate feeling of relaxation when you get into bed.

It also performed well in warmer weather. Linda tested the mattress during a summer heatwave and found that it stayed cool throughout the night. While no mattress can completely prevent overheating, especially during extreme temperatures, the combination of breathable materials and temperature-regulating technology helped create a cooler, more comfortable sleeping environment.

The only practical consideration is the height and weight of the mattress. At 28cm deep, it has a real premium feel, but if your bed frame is already tall, you may find you need to climb slightly higher into bed. Linda also noted that its substantial build makes changing the sheets a little more effort. However, for a mattress designed to deliver a luxury sleep experience, those are small compromises for the comfort it provides.

Should you buy the Evermore 1500 Pocket Spring Foam Hybrid Mattress?

Judging by Linda's experience, this is a mattress that deserves more praise than it currently gets. When we put the question of whether she would recommend the mattress to a friend, or indeed buy it next time she's replacing her mattress, the answer was an emphatic "yes." She added "if you’re looking for a mattress with a luxury feel without the five-star price tag, and one which offers cooling technology, I wouldn’t lose any sleep over buying this mattress."

Testing it during a heatwave meant that Linda could scrutinise this in a new way and reported back that she was " one happy sleeper and woke up feeling refreshed (rather than like a hot water bottle)" during weeks of hot weather. It seems that the Evermore just gained its place as a new woman&home favourite.

It’s official: ghd has been the first name in straightening for 25 years. To celebrate a quarter of a century of whipping frizzy, naturally unruly hair into shape, they’ve launched their highest-tech tool yet, the ghd Sculpt.

I have been straightening my very curly, fluff-prone hair since I was 15, so you can trust my opinion on the best straighteners. I’ve tried them all – from the ones that smoothed my hair in moments to the ones that singed my strands and left me with split ends.

My trusty original ghd’s saw me through my teens, and I’ve tested every one of their new launches since. In my opinion, the Platinum+ Styler is the best ghd straightener, but can the Sculpt knock it off the top spot? Let’s find out…

Our beauty editor’s review of the ghd Sculpt

The first thing I notice when I pick up the ghd Sculpt is how light they are. If straightening your hair normally leaves you feeling like you’ve spent 20 minutes on arms at the gym, you’re in for a treat. The reason it’s so light is that GHD has moved as many materials as possible into the plug, and a chunkier plug feels like a very fair trade-off for such a lightweight styler.

A second big tick for me is that the plates go almost to the edge of the tool, making it easy to get right into those tighter curls at my roots and fluffy baby hairs around the front. The waterfall edge is also really good for curling and waving. I rarely wear my hair poker-straight, and the rounded edges make it easy to add some movement.

The ghd Sculpt looks good too. If you’re spending more than £350, you definitely want a bit of wow-factor when you open the box. I tested the white pair, and the silver plates and interior make them fancier than my other irons, with a slight space-age edge.

How does the ghd Sculpt perform?

The key selling point of the ghd Sculpt is that it uses AI heat-adapt technology to adjust the heat of the tool in real time. It does this in response to how hot your hair is, rather than how hot the plates are, reducing heat where needed and making sure there isn’t any damage to the hair structure. Like all other ghd straighteners, the max temperature is 185°C, but I would say that my hair has felt pretty hot every time I’ve used the Sculpt so far.

My hair can be resistant to straightening, and when it’s particularly coarse and stubborn, it’s difficult to pull a brush through it, let alone a straightener. The ghd Sculpt glided through my hair without snagging, smoothing large sections really quickly. I managed to straighten all of my thick hair in twelve minutes flat. When I took the straighteners into the office, our fine-haired beauty writer managed to straighten her hair in two.

The finish lasts too. I tested the ghd Sculpt on some of the hottest days of the year, and it managed to keep frizz at bay even after a particularly sweaty nursery drop-off and lunchtime pilates class. My hair stayed sleek and straight until the next wash day.

ghd sculpt hair straightener review: My verdict

If you’re someone who straightens their hair pretty much every day and is looking for an efficient straightener that will leave hair straight and sleek in record time with minimal damage, then this is worth the investment. The lightweight design makes the ghd Sculpt a breeze to use, with plates that get right to the root so you’re not left with a tell-tale wave around your crown.

The AI technology behind the tool is innovative and interesting, but difficult to see in action as there isn’t a temperature display. I’m excited to see if this industry-first move of measuring hair temperature rather than plate temperature makes a difference to the health of my split-end-prone hair in the long run – I’ll report back…

There's nothing worse than buying a pair of running shoes that feel great for the first few wears, then lose their bounce - or, worst of all, start to rub your feet. That's why I've been reaching for the Asics Gel Nimbus 28 when I've got easy miles to do, and comfort is key.

The plush sole and flexible, textile upper make for comfortable wear for hours at a time. I've worn these shoes for everything from a 5km to a half-marathon, bouncing around along the pavement for over two hours without an issue.

Released in January, I've barely had them off my feet since then. They might not be your go-to for speedier runs, race day, or as a pair of trail running shoes, but if you've only got the budget for one pair, then I reckon you'd be just fine in these - especially as they are now on sale.

Asics Gel Nimbus 28 review

Specifications

• Size range: 
• Weight: 242g per shoe
• Heel-to-toe drop: 8mm
• Waterproof version available: No

What are the Asics Gel Nimbus 28 like to run in?

I'm not very familiar with the long history of the Nimbus lineup, but I have tried the Gel Nimbus 27 - and these feel noticeably softer and lighter, so those are two improvements. Overall, they have a very cushioned feel, and comfort has clearly been the priority in these shoes.

It shouldn't be underestimated, either. Even compared to the Asics Superblast 3, the springier older sibling in the line-up, these have more cushioning and feel more stable underfoot, making them a smooth, reliable ride - just what you want in an all-rounder running shoe, especially if you're not too concerned about breaking speed records.

However, they are still plush and feel noticeably lightweight, and have a slight rocker in the sole, which is designed to push you forward through every step. I can feel this on my runs, so while I tend to take it at a slower pace in these shoes, I have stepped it up to faster paces without any issues, clocking in 10km and a half-marathon personal bests.

The locked-in feel provided by the cushioned ankle girdle and classic interlocking lace system only adds to this comfort and support, as does the thin tongue on the upper, which is breathable and entirely flexible, so it can be stretched right over the foot to avoid rubbing.

The Asics Gel Nimbus 28 is a shoe designed for neutral runners or under pronators (where your foot rolls slightly outwards). If anything, I'm an over pronator (my foot rolls inwards), but I've never had any issues in these, so I think they're just about suitable for just about everyone. However, if you're unsure, get a gait analysis test and try them on first.

Who are the Asics Gel Nimbus 28 running shoes made for?

While a more responsive, springier running shoe will be a better choice for speedier runs and race days, one with a stronger rocker and even less weight to it, not everyone has the budget for multiple pairs of shoes. The Asics Gel Nimbus 28 is a running shoe designed for easy, longer runs, with comfort and impact protection on roads and pavements in mind. However, I think they fair up well when you push through to faster paces, so I'd recommend them to anyone - whether you're running as a beginner or have been going for years.

It's rare to find a shoe that I'll give such a rave review to, but over the last six months, they've been a versatile go-to for all my running - and I actually look forward to wearing them. My ankle-breaking speed shoes? Not so much, so they often get left behind.

The Asics Gel Nimbus 28 could also be a good walking shoe - or one for those who like to try Jeffing. I've spotted many women wearing them in central London, walking with speed up escalators and along busy tube platforms, no doubt because they are so comfortable. However, I personally wouldn't walk in them - I'm not used to shoes with additional stack height when walking, so I have dragged the soles on the ground many times, making for a loud sound and unnecessary wear to the soles.

The w&h verdict

I'd recommend the Asics Gel Nimbus 28 running shoes to anyone. Their comfort, stability, breathability, and lightweight feel make them a pleasure to wear for long and/or easy runs, and I've pushed through to faster paces without an issue.

These are the shoes I want to reach for every time I head out the door, which is perhaps why they are so worn after six months. That's hundreds of miles, hundreds of thousands of steps, and many, many workouts.

If you're a fan of the Hoka Clifton 10 or Bondi 9, then I'd say these are a close match in terms of cushioning, but offer a little more energy return for longer runs.

I opted for the pastel pink colourway when I got these shoes in the winter, which made for a pleasant pop of colour in my running wardrobe, but it didn't wear particularly well in wetter and muddier conditions, compared to the darker blue, purple, and black colourways that are also available. Now it's summer, you wouldn't have that same problem.

When it comes to eco-conscious, cooling luxury sleep, few brands do it better than Naturalmat. The Devon-based company has been crafting premium bedding in its solar-powered factory since 1999. While it's perhaps best known for its exceptional mattresses, I want to introduce you to its centre-stitched wool pillow.

The centre-stitched design might look unusual, but it's been created specifically for people who struggle with neck pain. The natural dip cradles your head, helping to keep your neck aligned while you sleep. It certainly feels different from a traditional pillow, but for anyone who needs that extra support, it's a dream come true.

The thoughtful design is matched by equally impressive materials. Filled with organic wool and wrapped in organic cotton, this pillow cushions your head without relying on synthetic foams or chemical-heavy fillings. Those naturally breathable fibres also make it an excellent choice for hot sleepers, earning it a place among the best cooling pillows you can buy.

Naturalmat The Centre Stitched Wool Pillow review

• RRP: £90
• Filling: Organic cotton, organic wool
• Firmness: Firm
• Size: 48 x 74 cm
• Guarantee: 5 year

Who would the Naturalmat The Centre Stitched Wool Pillow suit?

• Anyone with neck pain – the centre stitch creates a natural cradle that supports your head and encourages better neck alignment.
• Hot sleepers – organic wool and cotton are naturally breathable and moisture-wicking, helping you stay cooler through the night.
• Anyone looking for a more natural pillow – it's made from certified organic cotton and British organic wool, without synthetic foam fillings.

The Naturalmat Centre Stitched Pillow is one of the brand's best-sellers for good reason. If you regularly wake up with a stiff or aching neck, I'd strongly recommend giving it a try. The stitched centre creates a gentle cradle that supports your head while helping to keep your neck comfortably aligned. It's not a cure for chronic pain - we'd always recommend speaking to a physiotherapist if neck pain persists - but it's a thoughtful design that could make a noticeable difference to your sleep.

Its also impressive when you look below the surface. The pillow is filled with traceable British organic wool and wrapped in an organic cotton cover. This makes it a great choice for anyone trying to create a more natural sleep environment: wool is naturally breathable and excellent at regulating temperature, while cotton feels soft against the skin.

Coincidentally, using natural materials also makes the Centre Stitched Wool Pillow brilliant hot sleepers. The natural fibres help wick away moisture and allow air to circulate, so the pillow feels fresher throughout the night. It won't eliminate night sweats or hot flushes altogether, but it can help create a cooler, more comfortable sleeping environment.

What is the Naturalmat The Centre Stitched Wool Pillow like to sleep on?

I test every pillow that we recommend so I can write from first-hand experience. For the Naturalmat Centre Stitched Wool Pillow, I also asked my mum to test it alongside me. While I'm a hot sleeper, I don't suffer from neck pain, so I wanted someone who could properly assess whether the centre-stitched design delivered on its ergonomic promises. My mum struggles with both neck pain and night sweats, making her the perfect second tester.

The first thing I noticed was how different this pillow feels from a traditional design. Most pillows lift your head above your shoulders, whereas the stitched centre creates a gentle trough that lets your head sink into the middle of the pillow while the sides offer support. It took me a night or two to adjust, but once I did, I found it really comfortable. The cradled feeling encouraged me to stay on my back instead of rolling onto my front (a habit I've been trying to break) and after a couple of weeks, the position felt completely natural. In fact, when I went away, I missed the distinctive feel of the Centre Stitched Pillow and found it much harder to get comfortable on a standard hotel pillow.

As with most natural pillows I've tested, I wouldn't describe it as a miracle cure for overheating. If you experience intense night sweats, you'll still get hot. What I did notice, though, was that I woke up feeling noticeably less clammy. The breathable wool filling and cotton cover seemed to manage moisture well, so my skin felt fresher in the morning, even after warm nights.

My mum was able to put the pillow's ergonomic design through a much tougher test. "I'd got so used to waking up with a stiff neck and shoulders that I'd almost accepted it as normal," she told me. "I'd tried thin pillows, U-shaped pillows, buckwheat pillows and firm pillows, but none of them completely solved the problem."

She noticed a difference almost immediately. "After a few nights of getting used to the different sleeping position, I was waking up without the same stiffness in my neck and shoulders. I could move much more freely in the mornings, and I also noticed my skin felt fresher overnight. It hasn't completely stopped me getting hot, but I definitely feel more comfortable sleeping on it."

Between the two of us, we came away with the same conclusion. This isn't a pillow that tries to feel plush or cloud-like. Instead, it's been carefully engineered to support your head and neck, and once you've adjusted to its distinctive shape, it's remarkably comfortable to sleep on.

Should you buy the Naturalmat The Centre Stitched Wool Pillow?

If you've been struggling to find a pillow that supports your neck without feeling rigid or uncomfortable, the Naturalmat Centre Stitched Wool Pillow is absolutely worth considering. The unusual centre cradle takes a little getting used to, but once you've adjusted, it creates a supportive sleeping position that can help ease pressure on your neck and shoulders.

Combined with breathable organic wool and cotton, it's also a brilliant choice for hot sleepers who want a pillow that feels fresher throughout the night. It isn't the cheapest pillow you'll buy, but the thoughtful design, traceable natural materials and impressive comfort make it a worthwhile investment for anyone looking to improve their sleep.

How we test pillows

At woman&home, we like to test all the pillows that we recommend to you. Our hands-on experience means that you don't just get to read about the impressive, paper credentials that each pillow boasts, you can also read about how it copes with real life sleeping problems in our slumber scenarios. For a pillow like this one, I tested it for comparison against all the other pillows and so that I could see what it was like for hot sleepers, but we made sure to have someone with neck pain testing the pillow too, so we could see whether it really meets the credentials for an impressive pillow for neck pain.

You can find out more about how we test pillows on our dedicated page.

Homemade ice cream and frozen drinks always sound like the perfect summer treat, but traditional machines often come with a catch: hours of pre-freezing, lengthy churning times, or both. Not GreenPan Frost though. In around 15 minutes, it can whip up everything from velvety ice cream and frozen yoghurt to slushies and frappés, making it one of the quickest ways to cool down when the temperatures soar.

You might already know GreenPan for its non-toxic cookware, but the brand's first venture into frozen treats has generated just as much excitement. The Frost combines an ice cream maker and slushie machine in one sleek appliance, making it a fun addition to any outdoor kitchen. It also arrives at a time when frozen drink makers are having a real moment, with the Ninja Slushi proving just how much demand there is for homemade ice cold drinks at home.

After the Frost sold out shortly after launch, I was keen to find out whether it lives up to the hype. Could one machine really replace both an ice cream maker and a dedicated slushie machine, while delivering delicious results in just 15 minutes? I put it through its paces to get the scoop on whether it's a worthwhile summer investment.

Greenpan Frost Ice Cream Maker and Slushie Machine review

• RRP: £399.99
• Dimensions: 43.8D x 22.2W x 44.1H centimetre
• Weight: 11 kgs
• Voltage: 230
• Pre-sets: classic soft serve ice cream and refreshing slushies, frozé, milkshakes, smoothies, protein shakes, frozen yogurt, dairy-free/vegan ice cream, custard, sorbet, sherbet, frozen cocktails, mocktails
• Frost settings: 7
• Dishwasher safe: yes

Who would the Greenpan Frost Ice Cream Maker and Slushie Machine suit?

• Families looking for healthier, homemade alternatives to frozen treats
• Hosts who want to impress guests with frozen cocktails, slushies and cool drinks
• Anyone who wants an ice cream maker and slushie machine combined into one appliance

Like most ice cream and slushie makers, the GreenPan Frost is a fairly sizeable appliance, so it's worth considering whether you'll get enough use out of it to justify both the cost and the counter space. For me, one of its biggest strengths is how easy it makes homemade frozen treats. Instead of relying on shop-bought ice cream or slushies packed with stabilisers and additives, you can make your own using just a handful of ingredients. GreenPan includes recipe ideas to get you started, but you'll also find plenty of inspiration online, and most recipes call for no more than five or six supermarket staples.

The Frost also stands out because it combines multiple appliances into one. While many frozen drink makers are dedicated slushie machines, this can churn soft-serve-style ice cream, frozen yoghurt, frappés and frozen cocktails too. It even has a dedicated alcohol setting, which adjusts the freezing process to account for alcohol's lower freezing point, so you can make frozen margaritas, daiquiris and other cocktails with consistently smooth results.

Ultimately, I think this machine makes the most sense for people who love entertaining or have a busy family home. If you're the house where everyone gathers for summer barbecues, birthday parties or major sporting events, it'll quickly become the appliance everyone asks for. Living in a one-bedroom flat, I struggled to justify giving it permanent counter space, but I can absolutely see why families, especially those with younger children, or keen hosts would get their money's worth.

What is the Greenpan Frost Ice Cream Maker and Slushie Machine like to use?

The GreenPan Frost is really simple and straightforward to use. It offers six programmes (milkshake, slushie, soft serve, sorbet, frozen yoghurt and frozen cocktails) with seven texture settings that let you fine-tune the consistency of your drink or dessert. The controls are intuitive enough that you won't need to use the instruction manual to get started: you simply press the illuminated menu button to cycle through the modes, then use the dial to adjust the texture. I was surprised by how much difference each increment made. Moving the dial just one step transformed recipes from a firm, scoopable consistency to something much softer and closer to Mr Whippy-style ice cream.

One of the biggest selling points is that there's no need to pre-freeze a bowl overnight. Instead, the Frost chills ingredients as it churns, with most recipes ready in around 15 to 25 minutes depending on the volume and ingredients. The machine works by cooling the chamber to well below freezing while continuously stirring the mixture, preventing large ice crystals from forming. In my testing, the outside of the machine stayed cool to the touch and it ran with a gentle hum that was noticeable, but never intrusive.

I started with slushies, using 500ml of fruit juice made from concentrate to ensure there was enough sugar for the mixture to freeze properly. Just under 20 minutes later, I had a perfectly icy slushie with the fluffy, spoonable texture you'd expect from a cinema or theme park machine. You can make larger batches too, but I found 500ml was a great amount for two generous servings and chilled slightly faster.

The ice cream and frozen yoghurt were both equally impressive. I tested a classic vanilla recipe made with whole milk, cream, sugar and vanilla, alongside plain yoghurt straight from the pot. Both churned into exceptionally smooth desserts in around 20 minutes, although my first batch came out firmer than I wanted. A quick adjustment of the texture dial softened it into a much creamier, softer serve, and I appreciated having that level of control without needing to restart the programme. Vegan ice cream recipes made with plant-based cream and milk also worked well, although plant-based yoghurts didn't achieve quite the same creamy consistency as dairy versions.

I also love sorbet, so was keen to see what this would be like, as well as how different it would be to a slushie. Blending fruit coulis with fresh fruit created vibrant, intensely flavoured desserts that felt fresher than anything shop-bought, and the Frost handled small mix-ins well without affecting the texture. The sorbet was smoother and creamier, more like blended fruit than the slushie, which had more ice crystals.

The frozen cocktail programme also lived up to expectations. Piña coladas emerged thick, creamy and bar-worthy, while frosé was beautifully smooth rather than icy. It's not just a standard slushie setting with a different name either, the dedicated cocktail mode compensates for alcohol's lower freezing point, so drinks freeze to the right consistency instead of staying liquid. This is important to note when you're shopping around, because standard slushie machines won't offer this special setting.

Cleaning the Greenpan Frost Ice Cream Maker and Slushie Machine

Cleaning these machines can be difficult, because there are so many corners and crevices which can get sticky. Luckily, the GreenPan Frost is low effort. Rather than requiring you to dismantle lots of fiddly parts after every batch, it has a dedicated rinse programme that does most of the hard work for you. Simply add warm water with a drop of washing-up liquid, select the rinse mode, and the machine churns the solution around the chamber to loosen any leftover ice cream, yoghurt or fruit residue.

I found the rinse cycle surprisingly effective. I refreshed the water a couple of times until it was coming out as clear as it went in, and that was enough to leave the mixing chamber clean after everything from creamy vanilla ice cream to sticky fruit coulis. If you've made something particularly rich, such as a frozen cocktail with coconut cream, you may want to repeat the cycle once more, but it's still a very hands-off process.

It's also important to disassemble and clean all the separate parts, although I would say it's not as smooth as some rival machines. However, for day-to-day use, the Frost is super simple It strikes a nice balance between being hygienic and low maintenance, making it much less of a chore to clean between recipes.

How does the Greenpan Frost Ice Cream Maker and Slushie Machine compare?

The closest rival to the GreenPan Frost is the Ninja Slushi Max, but they cater to slightly different audiences. If your priority is frozen drinks, the Ninja has the edge: it's generally faster to reach serving temperature (I had full-capacity slushies in 15 minutes), produces exceptionally consistent slushies and frozen cocktails, and its removable parts make it easier to give a deep clean after use. However, the GreenPan is the more versatile machine.

In addition to slushies, frappés and frozen cocktails, it can make soft-serve-style ice cream, frozen yoghurt and sorbet, effectively replacing a separate ice cream maker. I also found its slimmer, more upright design easier to accommodate on a kitchen worktop, despite both being fairly substantial appliances.

The adjustable texture dial on both give you more control over the finished consistency, allowing you to tweak recipes from firm and scoopable to light, airy soft serve. If your summer revolves around frozen margaritas and icy soft drinks, the Ninja Slushi Max is still the specialist to beat. But if you'd rather buy one machine that can satisfy both your ice cream cravings and your frozen drink obsession, the GreenPan Frost offers better all-round value.

Should you buy the Greenpan Frost Ice Cream Maker and Slushie Machine?

The GreenPan Frost will really earn its counter space in the swing of summer. It’s fast, versatile and cleverly designed, turning out everything from soft-serve ice cream to café-style frappés and frozen cocktails in around 15 to 25 minutes, without the faff of overnight freezing. The texture control is a standout feature, giving you real precision over the final result, while the rinse cycle keeps day-to-day cleaning relatively low effort.

It isn’t perfect. The machine is still a sizeable investment, both in price and footprint, and it won’t replace a dedicated deep-freeze setup if you’re after absolute professional-grade consistency or ultra-speedy batch production. And while cleaning is easy, it doesn’t feel quite as thoroughly disassemblable as some rivals, which may matter if you’re very particular about hygiene.

But judged on what it’s clearly designed to do, make frozen treats and drinks feel effortless and fun at home, it's a winner. If you want a single appliance that can handle ice cream for the kids, frozen cocktails for guests and slushies for hot afternoons, the Frost makes a compelling case for itself.

Sleep has a way of unravelling everything else. One bad night becomes a pattern, and before long you’re negotiating with yourself at 3am, kicking off the duvet, pulling it back on, wondering why something as simple as staying asleep feels so difficult. I see it constantly in the mattresses I test, and I’ve lived it too: overheating, broken sleep and waking up already tired before the day has even started.

Which is why the idea of the best cooling mattress is so appealing right now - especially for women dealing with menopause or anyone who simply runs hot at night. But the reality is, cooling alone isn’t enough. A mattress can’t just regulate temperature; it also has to support your body properly, ease pressure points, and feel comfortable enough that you’re not fighting it the moment you lie down.

The Origin Hybrid Pro Mattress sets out to do both. It combines breathable natural fibres, graphite-infused latex and a layered spring system designed to encourage airflow while still delivering a medium-firm, supportive feel. To see how that translates in real life, I asked our tester Karen - 54, menopausal, and sharing a double bed with her husband - to sleep on it for six months. The question is whether it can genuinely solve two of the hardest problems in sleep: staying cool and staying comfortable at the same time.

Origin Hybrid Pro Mattress: Specifications

• RRP £660 (single), £874 (small double), £939 (double), £1004 (king), £1190 (super king)
• Sizes available: SINGLE / SMALL DOUBLE / DOUBLE / KING / SUPER KING
• Depth: 31cm
• Composition: machine-washable zip-off cover, plush premium Tencel fabric infused with cooling threads – “up to 10°C cooler² for deeper, more restorative rest”
• Mattress Type: 5,700+ TitaniumCoil springs with HexAdapt techonology
• Firmness options: ultra-adaptive cushioning gives you the ultimate tailored support.
• Delivery options: Free next working day delivery (UK Mainland) if ordered before 9am
• Returns period: The 200-day trial begins when the mattress is delivered to your home.
• Guarantee: 100% money-back guaranteed, within 200 days. The mattress will be collected and donated to the British Heart Foundation, rather than being sent to landfill

How we tested the Origin Hybrid Pro Mattress

This mattress was put to the test by Karen Kay, a member of our tester network. Here's a little more about her.

What's inside the Origin Hybrid Pro Mattress?

In the composition description of the Origin Hybrid Pro, you'll notice some impressive details (as well as some terms that need unpacking a little). All of the materials are classed as "non-toxic" and "hypoallergenic" by the brand, which is brilliant if you have sensitive skin or you want to keep your bedroom as natural as possible.

When you dive into the details, you'll see the following, which I'll explain in more detail beside each element:

• Luxuriously-soft PolarSilk Tencel Top Cover: tencel is a natural fibre, which is brilliant for feeling super soft and silky, whilst wicking away moisture and letting your skin breathe. It's great for hot sleepers.
• Graphite Crystal Latex Core: this part of the core is designed to pull heat away from the body quickly, whilst also offering a softer alternative to springs. It's like the mid-point between springs and foam - you still get support, but you also get softness, without trapping any heat in.
• Proprietary HexaGrid Plus Core: this brings comfort and cushioning for pressure points, but is more firm than foam, so you won't sink into it as much
• Bamboo-Infused Wool Core: having both bamboo and wool in the core enhances how breathable the mattress will be, as both materials have open structures to allow for maximum airflow, but naturally, of course
• ErgoCoil Titanium MicroSprings and Cooling Comfort Foam Aerospace-Grade Titanium Springs: smaller springs are brilliant for giving airflow through the mattress, whilst also minimising motion transfer, which is helpful for anyone who shares a bed
• D-3 Edge Support: this reinforces the structure that springs naturally provide, ensuring that there's proper consistent firmness right up to the edge of the bed

If you want the quick summary of all that, at 31cm deep, the Origin Hybrid Pro combines springs, foam, and other technical layers (hence the hybrid name) to solve two of the biggest sleep complaints I hear from readers: overheating and pressure relief. Rather than relying on traditional memory foam alone, Origin has built the mattress around several cooling materials, which our tester found very helpful in practice, but we'll talk more about that below.

Who would the Origin Hybrid Pro Mattress suit?

• Women struggling with night sweats or menopause: the cooling materials can't work magic, but they seem to make a noticeable difference to temperature regulation without feeling cold.
• Couples with different sleeping styles: the excellent motion isolation and balanced medium-firm feel work well if one partner moves around or prefers a different sleeping position.
• Anyone looking for premium comfort without a luxury price tag: it feels considerably more expensive than its regular sale price and offers many of the features normally found in mattresses costing much more.

What impressed our tester, Karen, most about the Origin Hybrid Pro is how well it balances competing sleep needs, which is why it has a pretty open set of recommendations for who it would suit. Cooling mattresses often sacrifice cushioning, while softer beds can leave combination sleepers lacking support or too hot. Here, the mattress manages to offer supportive without becoming hard, making it particularly appealing for couples or anyone whose sleep priorities have changed with age.

For women experiencing menopause or night sweats, it's also one of the few mattresses I've tested where the cooling technology appears to deliver a genuine real-world benefit rather than simply sounding impressive on paper.

What's the Origin Hybrid Pro like to sleep on?

Medium-firm mattresses are always a popular choice, especially if you struggle with overheating at night. However, in practice, it's often a tricky spot to occupy - and we've tested many mattresses that end up feeling firm rather then medium-firm. The Origin Hybrid Pro actually manages to strike a balance that's difficult to achieve. It feels supportive without being rigid, cushioned without swallowing you up, and responsive enough that changing position during the night won't disturb your partner or demand too much energy. We predicted that the Origin Hybrid Pro would be good for this when we saw the composition: a combination of springs and softer layers look, on paper, like they should work really well for relieving pressure while keeping your spine properly aligned. It was brilliant to see that translated into real life too.

Karen, our tester, who has struggled with lower back pain for years, noticed the difference immediately. She told us that "right from our first night on the Hybrid Pro, my husband and I both felt comfortable enough to slip rapidly into blissful, restorative sleep." Even more impressively, that first impression didn't wear off. After six months of use, she reported "the same edge-to-edge support welcomed us every night, without any deterioration or tell-tale hollows," which speaks well of the mattress's durability as well as its comfort.

As a combination sleeper who alternates between her back and side, she found the mattress adapted well to different sleeping positions. Rather than creating pressure around the hips or shoulders, she described feeling "supported and cosseted, the mattress firm enough to ensure my spine was held, but with just enough 'give' to feel pressure-relieving – whether I was on my back or side." That's exactly what I'd hope to hear from a well-designed hybrid mattress: enough firmness to maintain healthy spinal alignment, but enough cushioning to prevent pressure points from building up overnight.

Couples should also appreciate its excellent motion isolation. Despite a significant height and weight difference between herself and her husband, Karen found their old problem of being disturbed by each other's movements disappeared. She compared her previous mattress to sitting on "a trampoline" where "every movement by my husband would transfer kinetic energy to my side of the bed." On the Hybrid Pro, those midnight disturbances were dramatically reduced, allowing them both to sleep more peacefully despite very different body types and sleeping styles.

Is the Origin Hybrid Pro Mattress cooling?

Cooling technology is one of the biggest selling points for modern mattresses, but it's also one of the claims I approach with the most scepticism. Plenty promise cooler sleep, yet few make a real difference once you've spent eight hours tucked beneath a duvet. The Origin Hybrid Pro, however, appears to back up its specifications with genuine real-world performance.

The cooling starts with the construction. Instead of relying solely on memory foam, which has a reputation for trapping heat, Origin combines a breathable PolarSilk Tencel cover with graphite-infused latex that's designed to draw heat away from the body, moisture-wicking bamboo-infused wool and ventilated titanium microsprings that encourage airflow through the mattress. None of these materials are revolutionary on their own, but together they create a noticeably more breathable sleeping environment.

For Karen, who experiences menopausal night sweats, that meant she could feel a tangible improvement. She described her changing hormones as leaving her body with "more extremes of temperature than a chef's kitchen," explaining that she'd gone from sleeping under thick duvets to waking "drenched in sweat in the early hours." While she's careful not to describe the mattress as a miracle cure, she was unequivocal about the difference it has made. "I am in no doubt that my nights are now far more comfortable and the incidence of waking, poached in perspiration, is happening far less frequently," she told me.

It is important to caveat that no mattress can stop hormonal hot flushes, and I'd always be wary of any brand suggesting otherwise. What the Origin Hybrid Pro appears to do is minimise the amount of heat that becomes trapped beneath you, helping your body regulate its temperature more effectively through the night. For women navigating menopause, or anyone who tends to overheat while they sleep, that can make the difference between repeatedly waking to throw off the duvet and sleeping through until morning. As Karen neatly summed it up, "I now regularly nod off in comfort and wake up rested."

Should you buy the Origin Hybrid Pro Mattress?

If you're looking for a mattress that combines supportive comfort with effective cooling, the Origin Hybrid Pro is one of the strongest all-rounders I've come across. It delivers a balanced, medium-firm feel that suits most sleeping positions, isolates movement exceptionally well for couples and, perhaps most importantly for many women, helps create a cooler, more comfortable sleeping environment without relying on gimmicks or exaggerated claims.

I particularly like that it doesn't force you to compromise. Too often, cooling mattresses sacrifice comfort, while softer models can leave your back crying out for support. Here, Origin has managed to blend pressure relief, spinal alignment and breathability into a mattress that feels thoughtfully engineered rather than overcomplicated. Add in the generous 200-night trial and frequent discounts, and it represents excellent value compared with many premium hybrid competitors.

Karen perhaps put it best after living with the mattress for six months: "I can confidently say I don't think you can go wrong with this one." She even added, "I have already recommended it to a couple of friends," which is often the strongest endorsement any product can receive. If you're a naturally hot sleeper, navigating menopause or simply ready to replace an ageing mattress with something that's supportive, breathable and built to last, the Origin Hybrid Pro would be an easy recommendation from me too.

When it was founded, Delivita (translated as delicious life) set out to deliver on more than its namesake. They created an oven that takes traditional clay interiors and makes it modern, wrapped in a colourful, handcrafted shell that wouldn't look out of place in a Tuscan courtyard/ And he's been improving the design year upon year upon year.

Today, DeliVita has earned a loyal following for bringing a little slice of la dolce vita to British gardens. Its ovens are instantly recognisable, with their vibrant colours, smooth curves and artisan feel, but they're far more than just pretty to look at. They consistently rank among the best pizza ovens because they combine traditional Italian cooking principles with modern engineering, reaching soaring temperatures while remaining approachable enough for home cooks.

As someone whose family ran a pizza business for more than a decade, I'm naturally sceptical of products that promise authentic results without the know-how to back them up. However, I fell in love with Delivita's original wood-fired oven, but I also recognised its limitations: live-fire cooking isn't practical for everyone. The new dual-fuel Flow promises to keep everything that made the original so special while adding the convenience of gas and a little more cooking space. After weeks of making everything from classic margheritas to heavily topped pizzas, I wanted to find out whether this beautifully Italian oven is as enjoyable to cook with as it is to look at.

Delivita Flow Dual Fuel Pizza Oven review

• Oven dimensions: 430mm x 628mm x 665mm (H x W x D) 
• Oven mouth: 175mm x 378mm (H x W) 
• Weight: 45kg 
• Fuel type: Gas + wood 
• Maximum temperature: Up to 550°C 
• Gas cooking readiness: Around 15 minutes 
• Wood-fired cooking readiness: Around 30 minutes 
• Typical pizza cook time: Around 90 seconds 
• Pizza capacity: 1 x 14” pizza 
• Cooking area: 570mm x 500mm 
• Outer shell: High-temperature powder-coated steel 
• Insulation: Clay-infused insulation 
• Inner chamber: Stainless steel 
• Cooking surface: Clay and stone 
• Available colours: British Racing Green, Chilli Red, Hale Grey, Orange Blaze, Royal Blue, Very Black 

Who would the Delivita Flow Dual Fuel Pizza Oven suit?

• Beginners who want an oven they'll never outgrow: The Flow is wonderfully approachable for first-time pizza makers, thanks to its reliable gas burner and generous cooking space. Once you've mastered the basics, switching to wood opens up a whole new world of smoky flavours, live-fire cooking and slower recipes. Rather than buying an entry-level oven you'll want to replace in a few years, this is one that can grow alongside your skills.
• Style-conscious hosts with compact outdoor spaces: Not every pizza oven complements a carefully designed garden, but the Flow is as much a design piece as it is a cooking appliance. Its handcrafted finish and wide range of colours make it a real focal point, while its compact footprint means it looks just as at home on an IKEA bistro table as it does on a bespoke outdoor kitchen. Whether you have a small courtyard or a larger entertaining space, it feels beautifully considered.

After months of testing, it's difficult to think of someone this oven wouldn't suit. It caters to beginners with dependable gas cooking that's easy to master, while giving more experienced cooks the flexibility to experiment with wood-fired pizzas, smoked dishes and slow-cooked recipes. It's also one of the most attractive pizza ovens I've tested, with enough colour options to complement almost any outdoor space without dominating it. The only real compromise is the price. This is undoubtedly an investment, but the craftsmanship and versatility justify the cost. While it only cooks one pizza at a time, I don't see that as a significant limitation when a 12-inch pizza is ready in as little as two and a half minutes.

What is the Delivita Flow Dual Fuel Pizza Oven like to use?

One of the biggest advantages of the Delivita Flow is that it removes many of the barriers that stop people buying their first pizza oven. Unlike some models that require lengthy assembly or calibration, the Flow arrives almost completely built. Aside from attaching the gas burner, it's ready to position in your garden and fire up. If you're cooking on gas, you'll simply need to connect it to a compatible propane canister using the supplied hose. I'd also recommend investing in a few essentials from the outset: a good pizza peel is non-negotiable, a brush makes cleaning the stone between cooks much easier, and a weatherproof cover will help protect your investment. A temperature gun isn't essential, but if you're serious about making consistently excellent pizza, it's one of the most useful accessories you can own.

Like all clay and stone pizza ovens, the Flow needs curing before its first cook. This involves running the burner for around an hour to gradually drive moisture out of the stone. You may notice a little condensation or dripping during this process, but that's completely normal and only happens once. After that initial cure, the oven is ready to cook in around 20 minutes, which is an impressive heat-up time for an oven with a traditional clay interior. Even more importantly, it reaches temperature evenly. I found the cooking stone heated consistently from front to back, which makes managing pizzas much easier and reduces the risk of burnt bases with undercooked toppings.

To properly test the oven, I cooked dozens of pizzas using different dough hydrations, topping combinations and cooking temperatures. I always begin with a classic margherita because it reveals almost everything you need to know about a pizza oven. With so few ingredients, there's nowhere for poor heat distribution to hide. My first pizza emerged after just 2 minutes 40 seconds with beautifully puffed cornicione, even leopard spotting underneath and bubbling patches of golden mozzarella across the surface. Those visual cues tell me the oven is doing exactly what it should: the stone is transferring enough heat to fully bake the base while the dome is generating sufficient radiant heat to cook the toppings at the same pace.

Just as importantly, those results weren't a one-off. Across more than 20 margheritas, the Flow delivered remarkably consistent pizzas. The bases developed a crisp, well-baked structure without becoming dry, the crust remained light and airy, and the tomato sauce reduced into a rich, concentrated sweetness rather than drying out. Good pizza ovens don't just produce one great pizza, they produce the twentieth just as well as the first, and that's where the Delivita really impressed me.

Marinara pizzas cooked even faster, averaging around 2 minutes 14 seconds thanks to the lighter topping load, but they highlighted another strength of the oven, which is the balance. Faster cooking often risks leaving the centre underbaked or drying the sauce before the dough has finished cooking. Here, neither happened. The dough retained its soft, open crumb while developing a crisp underside, and the tomato stayed vibrant and fresh.

Moving on to heavier pizzas loaded with vegetables and extra cheese required a different approach, but that's where the dual-fuel controls really came into their own. A simple adjustment of the flame lets you reduce the intensity, extending the bake just enough for thicker toppings to cook through without scorching the crust. It's an intuitive system, clearly marked with simple symbols, and one that beginners will quickly gain confidence using. More experienced pizza makers will also appreciate how precisely they can tailor the flame to different styles of pizza.

Perhaps my favourite thing about cooking with the Flow is simply how generous the cooking chamber feels. Although it's designed around a 12-inch pizza, there's ample room to launch, rotate and retrieve your pizza without feeling cramped, which is a detail that's easy to underestimate until you've wrestled with a smaller oven. The wide mouth also makes it easier to use taller roasting dishes or cast iron pans, opening the door to baking bread, roasting vegetables or cooking meat alongside pizza. It feels forgiving, spacious and thoughtfully designed, which makes the whole experience more enjoyable whether it's your first pizza or your hundredth.

How does the Delivita Flow Dual Fuel Pizza Oven compare?

I've made my way through testing all the best pizza ovens and the Delivita Flow is one of the most impressive of them all. For the sake of working out whether it's good value and what else is out there, it's worth making two comparisons. The first is to Delivita's all-wood model and the second is to the Gozney Dome, which offers the same dual-fuel function.

The Delivita wood-fired oven is very similar in design and cooking performance, of course. The single-fuel option is cheaper and wood-fired results are always the most flavourful. However gas is quicker, more reliable, and doesn't come with all the smoke of the single-fuel model, which makes it much more versatile and also beginner-friendly. If you have the space in your budget, I'd definitely recommend sizing up with the Flow to give you the options and versatility of a newer model.

The Gozney Dome is a more expensive and larger oven than the Delivita Flow. The difference between the Gozney and the Delivita comes down to aesthetics, as the cooking results in both were equally impressive. The Delivita has a more traditional Italian look and it sits nicely on a table as simple as the IKEA bistro set. It's smaller and cheaper, but still feels premium. The Dome is a more subtle, modern looking oven, which will suit a different kind of garden style. You can't go wrong with either.

Should you buy the Delivita Flow Dual Fuel Pizza Oven?

This is one of the most charming pizza ovens on the market, and that charm is backed up by impressive performance. It delivers the kind of authentic, Italian-style pizza you’d expect from a traditional wood-fired oven, with beautifully blistered crusts and a moreish light, airy base. The dual-fuel design is what really elevates it, giving you the freedom to cook with gas for speed and ease, or switch to wood when you want a more traditional, flavour-driven experience.

Beginners will appreciate how straightforward it is to get consistently good results without a steep learning curve, while more experienced cooks will enjoy the ability to experiment with heat control, fuel types and different cooking styles too.

I’ve been a fan of Delivita since I first tested its original wood-fired oven, and the Flow is a natural evolution of everything the brand does well. If you want a pizza oven that combines standout design, authentic Italian character and real versatility in one package, this is an easy recommendation.

How we test pizza ovens

At woman&home, we have a series of tests that we put every pizza oven through. I'm from a family that owns a pizza business, which means we are cooking all day and every day on both commercial and domestic ovens. We class ourselves as discerning customers as well as pizza oven snobs. We look at everything from set-up and storage through to warm-up time and, of course, how well the oven cooks pizza. It's a tough test to pass, but when we recommend an oven, you know it's something special. If you want to find out more about the process, you can read more on how we test pizza ovens.

Jo Malone London has never been a brand to shy away from luxury, but its latest launch takes things to an entirely new level. Their new Lime, Basil, and Mandarin Outdoor Candle is, quite simply, the most indulgent candle the house has ever created: a £300, five-wick statement piece designed not just to scent a space, but to transform an entire summer setting.

As a master perfumer, I’ve always admired Jo Malone’s ability to balance clarity with elegance in fragrance, but this takes candles from a glow in the dining room to the centrepiece of your outdoor living room. With five wicks and an oversized silhouette, it’s designed to throw fragrance across terraces, gardens, and open-air dining spaces in a way that's almost architectural in its presence. And of course, it comes in one of the brand’s most iconic scents, Lime Basil & Mandarin. It's their signature sun-bright blend of citrus zest, aromatic basil, and soft ambered warmth that has become a modern classic and one of my favourite fragrances for the summer.

I've been thinking about this candle since I saw it showcased in Jo Malone's London Townhouse alongside the launch of their most affordable room sprays to date. It's a brand new category of candle for the brand and it just might be one of their best yet.

Jo Malone Outdoor Candle: Lime Basil and Mandarin like you've never seen it before

• Dimensions: W 25cm x H 8.5cm
• Fill weight 1.5kg.
• Wax type: natural blend
• Wick type: cotton
• Fragrance: Lime, basil, and mandarin
• Wicks: 5
• Burn time: at least a summer
• Vessel: charcoal-toned porcelain vessel

Who would Jo Malone's Outdoor Candle suit?

At £300, this isn't a candle you'd just add to your basket on a whim. I've been thinking about it for months and am still saving up for one myself. Having borrowed one from Jo Malone to give a little test burn, here's who I think would love it the most:

• Frequent outdoor hosts who treat their garden like an extension of their home: this is made for long summer evenings spent entertaining outside, where every detail matters. If your table settings are considered and you love creating a “moment” for guests, this candle becomes part of the staging not just the scent.
• Luxury candle lovers who see fragrance as an experience, not a finishing touch: at £300 and with five wicks, this is firmly in collector territory. It will appeal to those who already invest in high-end home fragrance and want something that feels rare, sculptural, and unmistakably Jo Malone.
• Design-led entertainers who value statement pieces over subtle accents: this suits the kind of person who prefers impact: oversized vessels, beautiful objects, and talking points on the table. It’s as much about visual theatre as it is about scent, elevating an outdoor space in one decisive gesture.

What do you need to know about the Jo Malone Outdoor Candle

Jo Malone’s outdoor candle is a sensational piece of craftsmanship and fragrance. Created exclusively for outdoor use, it’s designed to elevate terraces, patios, and garden tables with a generous 1.5kg fill and a sculptural, charcoal-toned porcelain vessel finished in a soft matte glaze.

At 25cm wide, it feels substantial and grounding on a table, patio slab, or in the middle of a picnic. Like all Jo Malone pieces, it’s meticulously made in the UK by specialist makers, with natural waxes and cotton wicks. For me, this is one of the most important elements of a candle, because it gives you a cleaner, better-quality burn.

And of course, the fragrance is Jo Malone's signatures: Lime Basil & Mandarin. The bright citrus is crafted to cut through the air like sunlight, lifted by peppery basil and softened by a zesty, aromatic freshness that reads like a crisp summer breeze. It’s energising rather than overpowering, which is no small feat at this size, and it’s clearly designed to interact with open air rather than compete with it.

There’s a real intelligence in how it behaves outdoors: it doesn’t just smell beautiful, it shifts the mood of the entire space. When I borrowed it from Jo Malone, I actually didn't even need to light it to enjoy the fragrance both outdoors and indoors: yet more proof that this can be a style statement in and of itself.

Other luxury outdoor candles like the Jo Malone Outdoor Candle

Should you buy the Jo Malone Outdoor Candle?

If you host outdoors regularly and see your garden as an extension of your living space, this is as much a design piece for creating ambience and atmosphere as it is a collectible candle. At £300, it’s undeniably a luxury purchase, but as a master perfumer I’d argue you’re paying as much for the scale of the fragrance experience and the design as you are for the wax itself. If you want a candle that feels like a statement centrepiece rather than background ambience, this is a true treat. And if you want to expand on the ambience, make sure to look at our guide to flameless candles.

Keeping on top of everyday mess can feel like a full-time job, especially if you've got pets, children, or a busy household. Robot vacuum cleaners promise to take one of the biggest chores off your to-do list, but with premium models now costing well over £1,000, it's fair to wonder whether they really can replace your regular vacuum and mop.

If you're shopping for the best robot vacuum, you'll probably have come across the MOVA Z60 Ultra Roller Complete. It promises to vacuum, mop, empty its own dustbin, wash and dry its mop, and intelligently navigate around furniture, all with minimal input from you. So, we decided to put the MOVA under inspection, weighing up its cleaning performance, ease of use, smart features, and overall value for money. At £1,249, this is a serious investment, so it needs to earn its place in your home.

Our tester, Carly, admits she was initially doubtful that one machine could genuinely do it all, particularly as someone who doesn't consider herself especially tech-savvy. But after living with it for a month in a busy family home complete with muddy paw prints, spills, and everyday chaos, she was keen to find out whether it could live up to its impressive list of claims.

MOVA Z60 Ultra Roller Complete Robot Vacuum review

• RRP: £1,249
• Suction power: 28,000Pa
• Auto-empty base: Up to 100 days
• Mop system: HydroForce™ 12-nozzle Roller Mopping with hot wash and air dry at base
• Carpet protection: AutoShield™ – automatic mop lift on soft surfaces
• Obstacle detection: 200+ object types via AI vision and 3D mapping (FlexScope™)
• Edge coverage: 99.99% via MaxiReach™
• Threshold clearance: Up to 3.15" (StepMaster™ 2.0 and LiftPro™ Chassis)
• Brush system: TroboWave™ DuoBrush – tangle-prevention and airflow maintenance
• Warranty: 3 years

How we test robot vacuums

Before we get into the details of this robot vacuum review, here's some backstory behind the person who tested it.

What is the MOVA Z60 Ultra Roller Complete Robot Vacuum like to use?

If you've never owned a robot vacuum before, don't be intimidated by the setup. Most premium models follow the same process: connect the robot to the app, let it map your home, and make a few tweaks before sending it off to clean. My advice is to spend five minutes getting this first step right, because an accurate map makes all the difference to how well the robot performs day to day. Carly also flagged early on that the power cable is quite short, which limits where the base station can live. As it's "big and a bit of an eyesore if you haven't got anywhere to hide it" Carly recommends doing some planning for where you'll sit the MOVA.

Once plugged in and placed in her home, Carly used the quick start guide to get it running.. She found the app easy to follow, with clear prompts reminding her to open any doors she wanted included in the map, switch on the lights, and clear obstacles from the floor before starting. Better still, the mapping process was impressively quick, taking under four minutes to scan her downstairs, beating the app's own estimate. Once complete, the MOVA automatically divided her home into individual rooms, which she could then customise. She merged the sections of her open-plan kitchen and dining space into larger cleaning zones, commenting that the controls were intuitive and simple to edit.

There are a couple of small things I'd recommend checking once the initial map is complete. Robot vacuums can only map the rooms they can physically access, so any closed doors will leave spaces off the plan until a later scan. Carly also noticed that the robot missed the narrow space behind one open hallway door, despite there being enough room to reach it. It's a minor quirk rather than a dealbreaker, but it's worth taking a minute to inspect the finished map before your first clean. Once everything is laid out correctly, you'll only need to make changes if you move furniture or want to create new cleaning zones.

I've tested enough robot vacuums to know that consistency matters more than bold cleaning claims and specs. Carly was looking for the MOVA to live up to its claims during her month of testing. Rather than bouncing around randomly, it cleaned in "neat back-and-forth lines" across each room, with the app showing its progress in real time. Carly admitted she found herself watching it at first because it was "strangely satisfying," before getting on with other jobs, which is exactly what a robot vacuum should allow you to do.

The 28,000Pa suction proved more than capable of handling the daily debris most households generate, from crumbs to pet hair. Carly was particularly impressed by how well it cleaned underneath furniture that her upright vacuum couldn't reach, and she found the anti-tangle brush lived up to its promise in a home with a dog. As she put it, the robot reached places her "regular vacuum simply can't."

Navigation is another area where premium robot vacuums should shine, and the MOVA was generally nimble and sensitive. Carly found it avoided obstacles that were too tall to climb, rather than getting stuck, and she watched it improve after encountering a tricky kitchen threshold. "Watching it learn from its errors was cool to watch," she says. Like every robot vacuum we've tested, though, it still struggles with tightly packed dining chairs. If you'd normally move them when vacuuming, you'll get the best results by doing the same here.

The only area where I'd encourage you to keep your expectations realistic is deep cleaning. Robot vacuums are brilliant for maintaining clean floors between bigger cleans, but they're not a complete replacement for a powerful cordless or upright vacuum. Carly reached the same conclusion, describing the MOVA as "a brilliant top-up cleaner." She found it didn't collect every last particle in one pass and, like most robot vacuums, it couldn't reach right into corners. For everyday maintenance, however, it performed exactly as you'd hope.

Vacuuming

Mopping systems are relatively new in the world of robot vacuums, especially ones that do a good job. Plenty of robot vacuums claim to mop, but many simply drag a damp cloth around the floor. The MOVA's roller system is much more sophisticated, continuously feeding clean water onto the roller while removing dirty water at the same time. Carly says this was the feature that "really won me over," largely because the robot handles the entire process itself.

She found it cleaned both tiled floors and LVT effectively, automatically lifting the roller whenever carpet was detected so there was no risk of soaking rugs. Better still, once the cleaning cycle finishes, the docking station washes and hot-air dries the roller for you. As someone who "loathes dealing with mop heads," Carly says this self-cleaning feature ended up being her favourite part of the whole machine.

She also tested the included pet odour solution and noticed her floors smelled noticeably fresher afterwards, which is a worthwhile bonus if you're constantly cleaning up after muddy paws or shedding pets.

Mopping

A good robot vacuum lives or dies by its app, and thankfully MOVA has kept things approachable. My advice is not to get overwhelmed by the long list of settings: start with the automatic modes and only dive deeper if you enjoy tweaking every detail.

Carly found the app "well laid out" and especially appreciated the scheduling function. Being able to set the robot running while the family was out meant she could return to freshly cleaned floors "without having done anything." She also praised the intelligent CleanGenius mode, saying it "did the job without any messing about," while noting that anyone who enjoys fine-tuning settings has plenty of options to explore.

There are just a couple of practical quirks to bear in mind. Carly points out that pressing pause doesn't automatically send the robot back to its dock, so you'll want to stop it somewhere sensible if you interrupt a cleaning cycle.

Cleaning the MOVA Z60 Ultra Roller Complete Robot Vacuum

One feature that rally makes a difference in day-to-day life is the self-emptying dock. Rather than asking you to empty the dustbin after every clean, the MOVA stores debris in its base station for up to 100 days before the bag needs replacing. It also returns to the dock mid-clean if necessary before picking up exactly where it left off, a process Carly says you "barely notice."

If you live in a multi-storey home, however, there's one limitation worth considering before you buy. Because the robot relies on its docking station to empty itself and maintain the mop, cleaning upstairs means carrying both the robot and its fairly substantial base between floors. As Carly explains, it's "doable," but it doesn't feel quite as effortless as using it downstairs. If most of your living space is on one level, this won't be an issue. In a typical two-storey family home, it's simply something to factor into your decision.

Should you buy the MOVA Z60 Ultra Roller Complete Robot Vacuum?

At £1,249, the MOVA Z60 Ultra Roller Complete is firmly in premium territory, and it’s fair to say this isn’t an impulse purchase. But as someone who’s lived with it day to day, Carly considers this less of a replacement for your vacuum and more of “a capable daily cleaning companion” She’s also realistic about its limits, pointing out that it’s “not magic,” because it won’t reach every corner, and upstairs use requires a bit of extra planning. Still, she’s clear on the bigger picture. For homes with kids, pets, and constant floor traffic, it does the heavy lifting in between deeper cleans, and that’s where its value really shows.

If what you really want is consistently cleaner floors without constantly dragging out the vacuum and mop, the case is strong. Carly ultimately found it “earned a permanent spot” in her home, with noticeably cleaner floors and far less effort required to keep them that way. And honestly, that’s the real selling point here: not perfection, but relief.

Summer has officially landed and, this time, it's coming in cocotte form. Le Creuset’s Fruit Cocotte collection takes everything we already love about the brand’s iconic mini cocotte and gives it a seasonal twist, reimagining it as glossy, sculptural fruit for the brunch table. We've got blueberry, strawberry and the brand-new peach in the collection, each one finished with textured detailing and charming leaf handles that make them feel almost too pretty to use.

Over the years, I’ve made no secret of my love for Le Creuset. I know it's expensive at times, and I’ve even done a deep dive into the question is Le Creuset worth it? My answer, when it comes to limited-edition, heirloom pieces like this is a firm yes. It's pieces like the Le Creuset Fruit Cocotte collection that will be passed down through generations, admired when you're hosting, and a simple piece that you can use to romanticise your everyday.

Built on the classic Le Creuset cocotte shape, the fruit cocotte collection is classic style with a fruity twist. It’s still practical: perfect for individual desserts, baked eggs, crumbles, smoothie bowls, and or stylish brunch servings, but it’s also made to be admired. Compared with a standard Le Creuset cocotte, these fruit-inspired versions bring a seasonal, giftable edge that makes them just as much a table centrepiece as they are cookware.

Le Creuset Summer Fruit Cocotte Collection

The Le Creuset Fruit Cocotte Collection is a limited-edition range that comes out seasonally, and sometimes not even annually. This year, alongside their traditional blueberry and strawberry, the brand has launched a peach design too. Asking me to choose my favourite would be like asking a parent to choose between their children. They're all lovely.

Who would the Le Creuset Fruit Cocotte collection suit?

The Fruit Cocotte collection isn't really about solving a problem in your kitchen: it's about adding personality to it. Yes, they're practical enough to bake, serve, and store food in, but their real appeal lies in the experience they create. If you enjoy investing in pieces that make your home feel more thoughtful, your table look more inviting these are some of Le Creuset's most charming limited-edition releases yet.

• Le Creuset collectors and gift buyers: If you already love collecting Le Creuset's seasonal launches, these are a natural addition. Their limited-edition status and sculptural finish make them more than just cookware. They're heirlooms.
• Anyone who loves to romanticise everyday meals: Whether you're serving fresh strawberries after a market trip, building a colourful smoothie bowl, or simply trying to eat more fruit, these cocottes somehow make everyday food feel like an occasion. They're ideal if you subscribe to the idea that beautiful serveware makes simple meals more enjoyable.
• Hosts who love creating a beautiful tablescape: These are made for entertaining. Fill them with olives, dips, soups, desserts, or seasonal fruit and they'll instantly become conversation starters. They're the kind of serving dishes that guests will ask about long before they ask what's inside.

What is the Le Creuset Fruit Cocotte collection like to use?

I've owned and tested plenty of Le Creuset mini cocottes over the years, so I knew these would be pretty as well as practical. I love how they dress up the everyday, making a simple bowl of fruit look Instagram worthy without me having to change a thing.

One of the most popular ways I've seen people using these cocottes are for individual cobblers (the Peach Cocotte is undeniably perfect for that). However, this year, they've become part of plenty of summer table styling articles and photoshoots. I've used them to serve berries after a trip to the "pick your own" fields near me, filled them with cherries and grapes for an easy fruit display, and even used them to elevate my usual breakfast smoothie bowl. It's a small touch, but serving fruit in fruit-shaped cocottes somehow makes healthy eating feel a little more like a treat. If you're someone who loves to romanticise the everyday, these are exactly the kind of pieces that bring joy to an otherwise ordinary meal.

That said, they're much more than decorative bowls. The premium stoneware feels solid in the hand and distributes heat evenly, making them brilliant for individual portions of soup, baked eggs, crumbles, cobblers and desserts. During testing, I moved them from the oven straight to the table without any issues, and because they're thermoresistant from -23°C right up to 260°C, they're just as happy serving chilled yoghurt or ice cream as they are piping-hot French onion soup.

As with every piece of Le Creuset stoneware I've tested, the glaze is one of the standout features. It's exceptionally smooth, resisted scratches from spoons during my testing, and cleaned up effortlessly afterwards, even after baked-on food. They still look box-fresh after repeated use, which makes the 10-year guarantee feel well deserved rather than simply reassuring.

Everybody knows that I'm a sucker for a Le Creuset launch, but I'm also careful with where I spend my money. The Le Creuset Fruit Collection is an easy investment for me, because they're so much more than the everyday ramekin and because they're timeless too. They make hosting feel more thoughtful, summer tables look more beautiful, and they give getting your five a day a special, fruity twist too.

Summer hosting has a certain pressure to it: the expectation that the food will be effortless, the drinks perfectly chilled, and the host somehow completely unfazed while juggling ten things at once. It’s exactly the kind of setting where the new Ninja FlexFlame BBQ, created by Ninja in collaboration with David Beckham, is positioning itself as the centrepiece.

You've probably seen the footballer stood at the grill on his socials, adverts, and on Ninja's social media. David Beckham has been championing the polished, confident barbecue since its launch at the beginning of the summer. And unlike lots of other collaborations, it's clear that Beckham backs the quality of this barbecue, praising its speed, quality, and clever, stress-minimising features. Now, after months of testing it, so do we.

Having cooked on this since April, our tester Sophie is seriously impressed. "This is not your flimsy, end-of-the-sale-season barbecue you wheel out once a year and hope for the best with," she says, "it’s designed for people who want to host properly." If you've been dreaming of upgrading your outdoor kitchen with a barbecue that can keep up with demand and minimise stress, you're in safe hands with the Ninja FlexFlame Gas BBQ Grill.

Ninja FlexFlame Gas BBQ Grill review

• RRP: £999-1,999
• Dimensions: 63.7 cm L x 156.69 cm W x 122.71 cm H
• Weight: 61.5 kgs
• Colours: stainless steel, green, and blue
• Temperature range: 95°C to 315°C.
• Functions: Grill, Smoke, Roast, Griddle, Pizza
• Fuel type: Propane gas
• Includes: FlexFlame ProConnect Cooking System, 2x Porcelain Enamel Cast Iron Grill Grates, Expandable Roast & Smoke Rack, Grease Tray, Removeable Pellet Box & Ninja Woodfire Pellets Sample Bag.
• Guarantee: 10 years

Which barbecue does David Beckham have?

You'll have spotted a fair few videos and pictures of David Beckham cooking on the Ninja FlexFlame Gas BBQ Grill. It's part of his partnership with Ninja which has seen him design a coffee machine too. The barbecue, however, seems to be a Beckham favourite.

Who would the Ninja FlexFlame Gas BBQ Grill suit?

• The confident summer host who loves a crowd: this is for someone who regularly feeds groups: the capacity covers garden parties and family gatherings without breaking a sweat thanks to the generous cooking space and keep-warm rack mean you can cook in batches without the first round going cold.
• The flavour-focused cook who wants more than standard gas grilling: if you like a bit of theatre and depth of flavour, the smoke mode is a real draw. Being able to add wood pellets at the touch of a button gives you that smoky, BBQ-house taste without needing a separate smoker setup.
• The practical, design-conscious upgrader: this suits people replacing a basic BBQ and wanting something more engineered: better heat control, less mess, and smarter airflow. It feels like a step up in build quality without moving into intimidating pro-kit territory.

It's safe to say that the Ninja FlexFlame Gas BBQ Grill impressed us. For what it can do, the Ninja is also reasonably priced, making it a great choice for people who want reliability as much as performance. It certainly takes a more modern approach to barbecuing and has a premium feel, but what else would you expect for David Beckham's back garden?

What features does the Ninja FlexFlame Gas BBQ Grill have

With widespread praise, especially for its barbecuing and pizza-making capabilities, it’s no surprise the FlexFlame has been such a hit. It’s also one of the garden trends and popular garden products I’ve been most frequently asked about by woman&home readers. That’s why its UK launch is so exciting: we can finally get cooking on gas.

What really sets the Ninja FlexFlame apart is how it builds on Ninja’s already impressive line-up of outdoor cooking appliances, combining and elevating their best features in one design. Here are just a few of the stand-outs:

• Five cooking functions under one hood
• Precise propane flame control: with a digital panel that lets you adjust function, temperature, and flame level. There's an option to auto-adjust the flames to economise on propane consumption
• Faster cooking using cyclonic air: preheats to 315°C in seven minutes and a fan provides heat in the grill cavity to crisp and brown beautifully
• Smoke infusions using Ninja Woodfire Technology: adding barbecue flavour to everything from low-and-low dishes, cold smokes, or any meal with just two cups of pellets

What is the Ninja FlexFlame Gas BBQ Grill like to use?

Anything SharkNinja puts their hand to comes out well. They're famously good air fryers and vacuums are a testament to that, so we had high expectations for their Ninja FlexFlame Gas BBQ Grill. And (spoiler alert) it delivered.

The first thing to say is that setup isn’t a casual five-minute job. Our tester noted that assembly “takes a bit of time and effort, which is worth factoring in before your first cook.” Whilst Sophie is strong, she noted that that you’ll likely want two people for lifting the firebox onto the base, because it's both large and heavy. That said, Ninja’s 3D interactive guide via the BILT app does help make sense of the process, and once it’s built, it feels solid and well thought through.

Once you get it going, the speed is seriously impressive. Unlike most barbecues, which need at least twenty minutes to get up to temperature, the Ninja needed only five minutes. Our tester was amazed at what a difference this made to her overall cooking experience. "I'll be honest," she said, "I'm not the most organised cook, so there’s normally a bit of a waiting period where we stand around a tepid, at best, grill. However, with the Ninja, I could start almost straight away and get food on plates almost instantly."

You can cook with the hood open for a more traditional BBQ feel, or bring it down to speed things up. Our tester, Sophie, found that “hood down noticeably speeds things up,” which is useful when you’re trying to serve multiple dishes at once.

On the grill itself, there’s a nice bit of nuance in how it cooks. There’s some temperature variation across the surface, but rather than being a flaw, it actually becomes a tool: you can move food around to manage cooking speeds. Burgers develop a proper sear with good structure, sausages cook evenly without splitting, and kebabs benefit from being rotated through hotter zones. "I sometimes miss some of the theatre of traditional barbecues with modern ones," says Sophie, "but with the Ninja, when fat hits the flames, there are satisfying flare-ups that give a proper char, which is exactly what I want from a gas BBQ, as well as tasty food, of course."

Half of Sophie's family are vegan and vegetarian, so whilst it's important to get a good grill on sausages, steaks, and burgers, she was keen to test some veggie alternatives. "Vegetables are where the Ninja really showed off its temperature control," says Sophie, "I loved that my courgettes and peppers picked up clear char lines without collapsing into mush, and I can move them between zones to get that balance of softness and colour really easily." Halloumi also holds its shape well, developing crisp edges without turning rubbery, which makes it an easy win for mixed veggie spreads.

The smoke feature is an unexpected, but nevertheless standout extra. Activated at the touch of a button using wood pellets, it adds a noticeable depth of flavour that goes beyond standard gas grilling. It’s not overwhelming, but it does give food that slightly slow-cooked, wood-fired feel, which a real bonus if you like layered flavour without extra equipment. "Of course," says Sophie, "you do need to buy the pellets and it is extra work, but I didn't mind because the rest of the barbecuing process is so easy." Sophie experimented with smoking vegetables and slow cooking meats, much to her family's delight.

Outside of the delicious food, Sophie was impressed with the practical design touches, which are signature difference to Ninja and which make a difference too. The drip system channels fat neatly into a collection tray, keeping things clean. Sophie added, "I know it sounds geeky, but I loved the the built-in extraction fan. It means that smoke doesn’t rush into your face when you open the lid, and overall output stays low." She also appreciated that the handles stay cool throughout, which gave her a lot more confidence when cooking under pressure, because her old barbecue burnt her hand plenty of times.

There are a couple of small frustrations. The lid doesn’t have a soft-close mechanism, so it can “slam shut if you’re not careful,” says Sophie. This feels slightly out of step with the otherwise premium build and it's not a game-changer, but is something worth noting.

Should you buy the Ninja FlexFlame Gas BBQ Grill?

If you’re after a basic, occasional-use BBQ, this is probably more than you need. But if summer hosting is something you genuinely enjoy, or aspire to do more of, the Ninja FlexFlame makes a strong case for itself.

It’s fast to heat, flexible in how it cooks, and forgiving enough that you don’t need to constantly hover over it. The ability to switch between open grilling, hood-down roasting, and smoke mode gives you far more range than a standard gas BBQ, without tipping into complexity. As Sophie put it overall, “food came out really well: evenly cooked and great results overall,” which really sums up its appeal, consistent, reliable, and satisfying to cook on.

This is a barbecue that offers less stress, more control, and just enough showmanship to make it feel like you’re absolutely barbecuing like Beckham.

The Gozney Arc Lite is one of the most exciting pizza oven launches I've seen this year. It's a premium brand promising to make their expertise more accessible and more compact too. So, naturally, as someone who has tested countless pizza ovens and grown up in a family that has run a pizza business for more than a decade, I'm more than intrigued.

On paper, the Gozney Arc Lite Pizza Oven distils everything that people love about the Gozney brand into a smaller, more affordable package. It has the sleek, architectural design that makes Gozney ovens instantly recognisable, but without the premium price tag that can put some beginners off. Could it be the best pizza oven for small spaces, beginners, and chefs cooking to a budget?

In person, the Arc Lite looks every bit as premium as its bigger siblings and delivers the same confidence-inspiring build quality. Most importantly, it cooks like some of the best pizza ovens I've tested. It heats quickly, holds temperature beautifully, and turns out restaurant-quality pizzas like it's no effort. For anyone who has admired Gozney from afar, the Arc Lite is the perfect entry point into luxury pizza making.

Gozney Arc Lite Pizza Oven review

• RRP: £349.99
• Dimensions: 43 x 48 x 30cm (WDH on outside)
• Weight: 12 kgs
• Max temp: 500ºC
• Cooking floor: 12mm
• Fuel type: Propane Gas
• Materials: cordierite stone floor
• Warranty: 5 years

Who would the Gozney Arc Lite Pizza Oven suit?

I normally find this question easy to answer, but the Gozney Arc Lite has almost univerdal appeal. It ticks the box for being price-friendly, it ticks the box for build quality and versatility, and it caters to advanced and beginner pizza chefs. the only people it doesn't suit are those looking for capacity (two pizza's worth of space), which is a rare demand. However, to help you get some clarity on whether this really is a pizza oven that your garden needs, I've highlighted three USPs.

• Anyone looking for a premium quality oven: if you like life's luxuries, you're probably already acquainted with Gozney's pizza ovens. They're some of the best on the market. hey have nailed the simple, pebble-like look, and, in my experience, would outlast competitors by two or three times.
• People shopping on a budget: it seems contradictory for this to be both premium and budget-friendly, but the Arc Lite is one of Gozney's most affordable models. The oven is one of the smallest in their range, which means t's one of the cheapest ways to get your hands on a Gonzey.
• Anyone with a small garden, yard, or patio: pizza ovens can get pretty hefty, which is why the Gozney Lite is a nice addition to the brand's collection. It can fit in an IKEA bistro table, which is about the smallest that you're going to get. As a side note, I actually don't think many people need ovens any bigger than this, as you can still cook a decent 12" pizza inside the Arc Lite. Even if you sized up to the Arc XL, all you're doing is giving yourself a little more height. You'd need to spend another £xxx on the Dome before you're cooking 2 pizzas at the same time.

What is the Gozney Arc Lite Pizza Oven like to use?

I've been looking forward to testing the Arc Lite ever since it was announced, and from the moment I lifted it out of the box, it felt like a signature Gozney oven. It's well-made, simple, and has all the small touches (including a tool for optimal stone alignment) that prove this comes from someone who really cares about pizza.

The setup process is really straightforward: the oven arrives almost entirely assembled, so all I needed to do was position the stone using the supplied alignment tool, connect the gas hose, and fire it up. Gozney gives you a mini recipe guide (and has lots of useful recipes on their site), as well as a sheet of instructions. They're not essential if you're somewhat familiar with pizza ovens, but brilliant to have if you're not very confident or a complete beginner.

Before cooking, I ran the oven for around an hour to burn off any manufacturing residue and properly cure the stone. That's standard practice for any pizza oven, not just the Arc Lite, but it's worth taking the time to do. Once that was complete, I was ready to start cooking.

The ignition feels solid and premium, and the flame control dial offers precise adjustments rather than the vague "high or low" settings you'll find on some cheaper models. I particularly loved watching Gozney's signature rolling flame dance across the roof of the oven. It creates an even heat pattern whilst also making the whole cooking experience feel wonderfully theatrical.

After the initial curing burn, I consistently saw temperatures climb beyond 320°C in around 20 minutes. That's one of the major advantages of a compact oven: there's less internal space to heat, so you're spending less time waiting and more time cooking. Using my infrared thermometer, I found the stone heated remarkably evenly from side to side. There weren't any hot or cold spots to contend with, which immediately gave me confidence when launching pizzas.

Another thing I quickly appreciated was the size. The Arc Lite is compact enough to sit comfortably on an IKEA bistro table, yet substantial enough to feel stable and robust. Unlike some larger pizza ovens, I never felt as though I needed a dedicated stand. I'd still recommend investing in a cover to protect it from the British weather, but otherwise it's a low-maintenance addition to a garden or patio.

Of course, cooking performance is what really matters, and this is where the Arc Lite shines. Over several weeks of testing, I cooked everything from feather-light garlic breads brushed with butter to heavily loaded vegetarian pizzas piled high with toppings. Every bake emerged with beautifully cooked bases, evenly coloured crusts, and excellent top heat.

A margherita is always my benchmark test. With so few ingredients to hide behind, every element of the bake is exposed. The Arc Lite absolutely nailed it. After around two and a half minutes, the base had developed beautiful leopard spotting, the crust had risen into airy, well-defined cornicione, and the mozzarella was bubbling with just the right amount of caramelisation.

What impressed me most was the consistency. Even after cooking ten pizzas back-to-back for family and friends, the stone retained heat exceptionally well. On many entry-level ovens, that's the point where cooking times begin creeping upwards as the stone struggles to recover between bakes. Here, the timings remained remarkably stable, which speaks volumes about the oven's heat retention and thermal efficiency.

I always judge an oven by its crusts and was pleased with how beautifully these puffed up. When the pizzas were cooking in two and a half minutes (the same amount of time as Gozney's commercial ovens), I wondered whether it would be enough to cook the dough and ingredients properly. However, the crusts cooked all the way through, creating s delicious combination of crisp exterior and light, airy interior that pizza enthusiasts spend years chasing. The tomato sauce intensified without drying out, the mozzarella delivered perfect stretchy cheese pulls, and cheddar toppings developed a lovely golden crunch. Every pizza balanced texture and flavour with true Gozney flair.

Even heavily topped pizzas performed brilliantly. In my most extreme tests, cooking times stretched to around three minutes, which is still pretty quick. More importantly, the additional toppings didn't leave me with undercooked dough or patchy results. My peppers retained a slight bite whilst becoming steaming hot and lightly charred at the edges, which is exactly what I want from a pizza oven.

I was equally impressed by simpler pizzas. A marinara is often overlooked as a test, but it's a brilliant way to assess how an oven handles dough and sauce without relying on cheese. The Arc Lite delivered fluffy crusts, beautifully developed colour, and rich, concentrated tomato flavour. As a family of pizza snobs, we were fully prepared to nit-pick and find fault. Surprisingly, we couldn't find much to complain about.

My only small reservation is that the compact cooking chamber leaves slightly less room for manoeuvre than larger ovens. If you're completely new to launching and turning pizzas, there may be a short learning curve. We used Gozney's dedicated peel during testing and had no problems, but we're also very comfortable handling pizzas. Complete beginners may need a little practice before they feel confident working in the tighter space.

Cleaning up after the pizza oven is pretty simple. There are professional ways, tips, and tricks to cleaning your pizza oven, but, really, it's very simple. If you have a wire brush, give the oven a scrub after use, don't use any water, and make sure you have a cover to protect it against the elements. As long as you don't get your pizza stone wet and you can keep the oven safe from the elements, it should last for a long time.

How does the Gozney Arc Lite Pizza Oven compare?

The Arc Lite joins a growing family of impressive Gozney pizza ovens, and naturally its closest sibling is the Tread. Both are compact models designed for people who don't have endless outdoor space, but they cater to slightly different audiences. The Tread leans into portability and adventure cooking, whereas the Arc Lite feels more like a permanent fixture for your patio or garden.

Outside the Gozney family, the obvious competitor is Ooni Karu. The Ooni Karu retails at around £100 less and offers some extra convenience features such as viewing windows, folding legs, or access to accessories like rotating pizza stones. If value is your main priority, Ooni remains incredibly compelling. I cooked some really good pizzas in the Karu and have read plenty of appreciation for the ease at which it sits on a table.

However, after testing both brands extensively, the Arc Lite feels more refined and premium. The build quality, flame management, heat retention, and overall cooking experience all feel a step above. It's the oven I'd choose if I wanted something that feels luxurious to own and use, whilst still delivering the fast, high-temperature cooking performance serious pizza makers are looking for.

Should you buy the Gozney Arc Lite Pizza Oven?

I will say it all summer: the Gozney Arc Lite is one of my favourite launches the pizza oven category will see for a long time. The balance of a reasonable price, garden-friendly size, and Gozney-style quality is unmatched by any other brand. It's a true treat for any hosting, outdoor kitchens, and even small patios. I can see these selling out multiple times over.

How we test pizza ovens

At woman&home, our pizza oven tests are perhaps the fiercest of them all. My family runs a pizza business, which means that we have decades of commercial experience and commitment to pizza tucked into our aprons. We come at our pizza oven tests with a high bar, but also an open mind. We know some people just want a pizza oven that nails the basics, whilst others would rather have one that covers a whole range of recipes.

Our tests start with simple pizzas, looking at how the base cooks, cheese melts, and what the sauce tastes like. We look for consistency, both across the base of the pizza as well as over all the different pizzas that we cook. We try different toppings, heat temperatures and dishes, so you can cook more than pizza in your oven. We'll also talk about what the oven is like to store, clean, and maintain, so that you know exactly what you're letting yourself in for when you invest in a pizza oven.

If you're curious to find out more on how we test pizza ovens, you can visit our dedicated page.

In true British fashion, the weather is all any of us can talk about right now. And for good reason: the heat is causing serious disruption to our daily lives. Travel is chaos, schools are closing, and with temperatures sitting as high as 26°C at night, sleep is nigh-on impossible.

Naturally, everyone is looking for ways to stay cool in a heatwave, especially overnight. From cooling fans and blackout blinds to switching up bedding, it all feeds into the same goal: how to keep your bedroom cool when the temperature refuses to drop. Two of our go-to tools for getting sleep in the heat are cooling fans and the best cooling bed sheets, which together can make a noticeable difference to nighttime comfort.

I’ve been testing cooling sleep solutions extensively, and while nothing is a true miracle cure in extreme heat, Panda London’s bamboo bedding is one of the most effective options I’ve tried. It’s naturally breathable, moisture-wicking, and impressively soft against hot, irritated skin, making it a helpful addition when you’re trying to sleep through a heatwave.

Panda London Bedding

Panda London’s bedding was initially recommended to me by our Homes eCommerce Editor, Laura Honey, as a potential solution for managing hot flushes and overheating at night. On first inspection, I was slightly underwhelmed: it wasn’t as instantly soft or cool to the touch as I had expected straight out of the packaging, and it felt quite slippery in a way that didn’t immediately read as “comfort”. But first impressions don’t do this bedding justice.

After just a few nights, I could place complete confidence in these sheets. Sleeping in them is a joy - I mean, being excited to go to bed and doing a silent 'ahhh' every time I lie down sort of delight.

That initial slipperiness does take a bit of getting used to, but once you adjust, it becomes part of what makes it so comfortable and fluid to sleep in. No matter how warm the room gets, the sheets and duvet covers consistently feel cool against the skin, so getting into bed is instantly calming rather than sticky or stifling.

No matter how hot my bedroom might be, the sheets and covers are always cool to the touch, so it's instantly comfortable to climb into bed. And no matter how hot I am, the bedding never accentuates this or makes me feel trapped in heat. The clever material allows air to move freely, and draws sweat away from my skin. And while the latter might seem off-putting, it's brilliant, for two reasons.

Firstly, it keeps me cool, and secondly, this material gets softer with every wash. It is soft out of the packet, but after washing this bedding a few times and the difference in softness was undeniable. Combined, this makes for the most comfortable sleep I'm likely to get in a heatwave.

Laura says: 'As someone who has tested a wide range of cooling sleep products and ways to keep your bedroom cool, Panda London’s bamboo bedding consistently stands out. The fibre is naturally moisture-wicking, helping to draw sweat away from the skin, while its open weave structure allows air to circulate rather than trapping heat close to the body. Together, these properties make bamboo one of the most effective natural materials for supporting temperature regulation during a heatwave.

'Personally, what I notice most is how soothing the bamboo bedding feels. In extreme heat, my skin doesn’t just feel warm, it can become inflamed and itchy, and this is where bamboo bedding really excels. It feels exceptionally soft, calming and non-irritating against hot, sensitive skin, which makes a noticeable difference to sleep comfort on very warm nights. For me, it’s one of the most reliable options for improving sleep when temperatures rise.”

Who would the Panda London Bedding suit?

• Hot sleepers and heatwave sufferers: this bedding is ideal if you regularly wake up overheating or struggle most on warm, still nights. Its breathable, moisture-wicking properties help regulate temperature and reduce that “trapped heat” feeling that can build up with standard cotton or synthetic bedding.
• Anyone looking for a natural cooling alternative: if you want to avoid gimmicky cooling tech or heavy synthetic fabrics, bamboo is a strong natural option. It works with airflow rather than against it, helping your body stay more comfortable without relying on artificial cooling treatments or overly engineered finishes.
• Sensitive or reactive skin types: this is a particularly good choice if your skin feels irritated, itchy, or inflamed in the heat. The fabric is exceptionally smooth and gentle, which can help reduce friction and create a calmer, more soothing sleep environment when your skin is already feeling overstimulated.

Panda London’s bamboo bedding really comes into its own when comfort is compromised by heat, sensitivity, or disrupted sleep. It won’t actively cool the room, but it does a very good job of managing how your body experiences warmth, keeping airflow moving, moisture under control, and the surface feel soft rather than sticky or abrasive. For anyone who finds summer nights uncomfortable, or who simply wants bedding that feels more breathable and skin-friendly than standard cotton, it’s a reliable, low-fuss upgrade that makes a noticeable difference in how well you sleep when temperatures rise.

Alternatives to Panda London Bamboo Bedding

We've tested plenty of other sets of cooling sheets to find the best ones to help you in the heat. Here are three of our favourites:

Panda London’s bamboo bedding isn’t a gimmicky “instant cooling” fix, and it won’t magically teach you how to stay cool in summer all of the time, but it does make a noticeable, practical difference to how comfortable you feel in bed when temperatures rise. What stands out most is the balance it strikes: breathable, moisture-managing fabric combined with a soft, skin-soothing feel that makes hot, sticky nights easier to tolerate. For hot sleepers, sensitive skin, or anyone trying to get through summer nights with a bit more ease, it’s one of the most dependable bedding upgrades you can make.

As temperatures soar and the nation collectively searches for ways to stay cool, the Ninja Slushi Max is absolutely the most fun way to beat the heat. In as little as 15 minutes, it transforms juice, coffee, wine, cocktails, and soft drinks into perfectly chilled frozen treats, whether that's an iced frappe first thing in the morning, a frozen margarita for a garden party, or a fruity slushie for the kids on a sweltering afternoon.

Frozen drink makers are undoubtedly a luxury purchase, but after testing the Ninja Slushi Max through one of the hottest spells of the year, I'm convinced it's more than just a novelty. Every time I switched it on, people gravitated towards it. There's something irresistible about a perfectly smooth frozen drink when your kitchen feels like a greenhouse and even the best cooling fan is struggling to keep up.

I'll take you through every setting, from frozen cocktails and frappes to slushies and frosé, but here's the headline: the Ninja Slushi Max is a sensational addition to your outdoor kitchen essentials. Pour in your juice, select a preset, and minutes later you'll have a smooth, ice-cold drink that tastes like it's come straight from a beachside bar. After weeks of testing, I can completely understand why this machine has gone viral: it's an absolute joy to use.

Ninja SLUSHi MAX Frozen Drink Maker review

• RRP: £349.99
• Dimensions: 50.2 x W: 21.8 x 43.5cm
• Weight: 14.55 kgs
• Capacity: 4.4L (12 260ml servings)
• Functions: Frozen Juice, Frozen Cocktail, Frozen Cocktail Max, Slush, Milkshake, SlushAssist
• Cord length: 151.89 cm
• Wattage: 280 watts
• Guarantee: 2 year

Who would the Ninja SLUSHi MAX Frozen Drink Maker suit?

The Ninja SLUSHi MAX is perfect for anyone who loves entertaining. If your ideal summer involves friends gathered in the garden, family barbecues, or children's birthday parties, this machine quickly becomes the centre of attention. I found it just as useful for making colourful fruit slushies and frozen lemonades for younger guests as it was for whipping up frozen margaritas, piña coladas, and frosé for the adults. The fact that it can handle water-based, dairy-based, and alcoholic drinks opens up plenty of possibilities, whether you're hosting a casual afternoon get-together or a full-blown summer celebration.

That said, this isn't the appliance for minimalists. The SLUSHi MAX is relatively large, and it performs one main task: making frozen drinks. If you're tight on kitchen space or prefer multi-functional gadgets, it may feel like a luxury rather than a necessity. However, if you entertain regularly or know you'll use it throughout the warmer months, the convenience and crowd-pleasing results make a compelling case for giving it a permanent spot on your countertop.

What is the Ninja SLUSHi MAX Frozen Drink Maker like to use?

The Ninja Slushi Max couldn't be much easier to use. Once I'd given all the removable parts a quick rinse, I slotted the auger into place, locked the vessel onto the motor base, and poured my chosen liquid into the top. The machine works by freezing liquid onto the chilled cylinder in the centre, while an auger continuously scrapes, stirs, and churns the mixture into a smooth frozen drink. It's mesmerising to watch and really reminds me of trips to the cinema when I was younger. The liquid looks like nothing is happening and then, all at once, you'll see it begin to thicken and turn to ice. Who needs Netflix when you have the Slushi?

There are six dedicated presets to choose from, plus adjustable freeze levels if you want to tweak the consistency. If I'm honest, I found myself relying heavily on the SlushAssist function, which automatically adjusts the settings based on your ingredients and takes a lot of the guesswork out of the process. Most of my drinks were ready in around 15 minutes, and none took longer than 20, which is super speedy. Competitors normally take around 30 minutes for comparable tasks and, when you're hosting, an extra ten minutes is really nice to have. Once the cycle finishes, the machine keeps turning the mixture to maintain the perfect texture until you're ready to serve, so there's no rush to gather everyone around.

Straight out of the box, the machine feels impressively robust. Everything clicks and locks into place with a reassuring firmness, from the vessel to the drip tray underneath. It takes up a fair amount of countertop space, but given that it can make up to 12 portions (around 260ml each), it's clearly designed with family gatherings, garden parties, and entertaining in mind. I can already imagine it at home in a luxury outdoor kitchen.

Can I use juice in the Ninja Slushi Max?

This was one of my favourite modes to test. It's perfect for creating alcohol-free frozen drinks that both adults and children will enjoy. I had the best results using fruit juice drinks with a higher fruit content, which produced vibrant flavours and a lovely smooth texture. Homemade juices and more "pure" premium juices work too, although I'd recommend straining them first if they contain lots of pulp, as this creates a more refined finish.

The resulting frozen juice was noticeably smoother than anything I've made by simply blending ice and juice together. There was none of the watery dilution you often get as ice melts; instead, every sip tasted intensely fruity and properly frozen from start to finish. I never knew a healthy drink could taste this good.

Can i make frozen cocktails in the Ninja Slushi Max?

One of the most exciting features of the Slushi Max is its ability to freeze alcoholic drinks. Most frozen drink makers struggle with alcohol because it lowers the freezing point, but Ninja has clearly engineered this machine to handle it.

I tested several classic frozen cocktails and was impressed by the consistency. The machine produced bar-style frozen drinks with a smooth, spoonable texture that held together beautifully. Whether you're making frozen margaritas, daiquiris, or experimenting with your own recipes and frozen wines, this setting takes a lot of the effort out of achieving that perfect slushy consistency.

Can I freeze drinks with high alcohol content in the Ninja Slushi Max?

The Frozen Cocktail Max setting is designed for stronger drinks with a higher alcohol content, and it's a surprisingly rare feature to find in a home machine. Again, the results exceeded my expectations. Drinks still froze evenly and maintained a satisfyingly thick texture, even when using recipes that would normally be difficult to turn into a frozen serve.

If you enjoy entertaining, this is the setting that will probably get the most attention. It feels a little bit like having a frozen cocktail machine from a holiday resort sitting on your kitchen counter.

What's a slushie like in the Ninja Slushi Max?

The Slush preset turned sparkling grape juice, lemonade, and cola into wonderfully fine, icy drinks with very little effort. What impressed me most was how evenly textured the slush was. Instead of large ice crystals or clumps, the machine creates tiny frozen flakes that give drinks a smooth, almost snow-like consistency.

Again, because the liquid itself is frozen rather than blended with ice, the flavour stays concentrated and doesn't become watered down over time. It's an excellent option for children's parties, summer gatherings, or simply cooling down during a heatwave.

Can I make milkshakes and frappes in the Ninja Slushi Max?

The Milkshake preset proved far more versatile than I expected. Using recipes from the included booklet, I made both a strawberry milkshake and a frozen iced coffee. For the richest results, I'd recommend using whole milk, plant-based barista blends, or adding a splash of cream.

The texture was wonderfully thick and creamy, sitting somewhere between a traditional milkshake and a frozen dessert. My frozen iced coffee in particular felt like something you'd buy from a coffee shop rather than make at home, with a smooth consistency and no icy chunks.

There are a couple of quirks worth mentioning. The machine isn't whisper-quiet, so you'll certainly hear it working, but it's not so loud that it drowns out conversation in the kitchen. Ninja also recommends using liquids containing at least 5% sugar, as sugar helps balance the freezing process. This means many zero-sugar soft drinks won't work particularly well without adjustments.

There's also a minimum fill line, although during testing I found the machine could handle slightly smaller quantities. That said, the best textures consistently came from filling within Ninja's recommended range. Given the generous 0.5L to 1.9L working capacity, it's particularly well suited to households that regularly entertain or families looking to keep everyone cool during warmer weather.

What is the Ninja Slushi Max like to clean?

Cleaning frozen drink makers can often be the least enjoyable part of ownership, but Ninja has made the process refreshingly straightforward. Once I'd finished serving, I filled the vessel with water and ran the dedicated rinse cycle, which flushes water through the system and cleans around the auger.

For a deeper clean, the machine disassembles easily. The removable parts slide apart without requiring much force, and I found it simple to access all the areas where residue could build up. The drip tray lifts away for washing, and the dispensing handle can be removed too. Considering how complex the freezing process seems, the cleanup was surprisingly low-maintenance.

How does the Ninja SLUSHi MAX Frozen Drink Maker compare?

I've also tested the GreenPan Frost alternative, which has one major advantage over the Ninja Slushi Max: it can make soft serve and ice cream as well as frozen drinks. That extra versatility makes it more useful as an all-in-one dessert machine, and it’s also smaller and more affordable, which will appeal if you’re working with limited counter space or trying to keep costs down. If you’re someone who likes the idea of one appliance covering multiple bases, from milkshakes to frozen desserts, it’s an attractive option.

However, in day-to-day use, the Ninja Slushi Max is the more polished and effortless machine. It’s noticeably quicker, easier to clean, and far more intuitive, with automatic settings that consistently deliver smooth, evenly frozen drinks without any fiddling. The GreenPan can feel a bit more hands-on by comparison, whereas the Slushi feels foolproof, which also makes it more kid-friendly. If frozen drinks are your main priority, the Ninja wins on ease and consistency, but if you want a smaller footprint and the bonus of ice cream-making alongside it, the GreenPan is a solid alternative.

Should you buy the Ninja SLUSHi MAX Frozen Drink Maker?

Overall, the Ninja Slushi Max is one of those appliances that's a bit indulgent on paper, but utterly justified once you start using it. It’s fast, intuitive, and consistently delivers smooth, ice-cold drinks that genuinely feel like something you’d order on holiday. Whether it’s morning frappes, garden-party cocktails, or late-afternoon slushies for the kids, it turns everyday moments into something a bit more special.

It’s not without compromises. It’s large, it only really does one job, and it comes at a premium price. But in testing, I found those drawbacks faded quickly once I saw how often it got used.

If your priority is fun, consistency, and ease, especially in the middle of a heatwave, the Ninja Slushi Max is hard to beat. It’s not essential, but it is exactly the kind of appliance that makes summer feel like a small celebration.

I have had my old Amazon Kindle since forever. I actually kind of loved that it was ancient, basic, and gloriously old-school – a truly reliable gadget you never even think about replacing until suddenly it’s worthy of a spot on the Antiques Roadshow. When I discovered that older models like mine would no longer be supported with modern software updates, I had to face facts. It was finally time to upgrade my Kindle.

While researching the best Kindles to understand my options, I found myself completely enthralled by the features of the new Kindle Scribe Colorsoft. I am a total sucker for Kindle book deals and have an obsessive reading habit. I'm also constantly glued to the Notes app on my smartphone, and I run my life via a collection of precious paper notebooks that I am forever losing around the house. Could a single device really pull my chaotic notes, piles of notebooks, and tower of books into one organised space? It sounded genuinely revolutionary.

I was lucky; Amazon kindly sent me a review unit to try out so I could see whether it really could combine all three habits into one. Conveniently, if you are looking to make the same jump right now, Amazon has just slashed its price for the active Prime Day sales event. Here is how it handled my daily routine when put to the test...

Specifications

• Screen: 11-inch paper-like, glare-free display
• Resolution: 300 ppi for crisp black-and-white text / 150 ppi for soft, pastel colour
• Colour Capability: View and annotate content in up to 4,096 colours
• Writing Latency: Ultra-low 12ms (meaning the ink feels instantaneous)
• Storage: 32GB capacity (ample room for thousands of books and notes)
• Battery: Up to 8 weeks for reading (approx. 2 weeks with daily heavy writing)
• Connectivity: USB-C charging, Wifi, and Bluetooth for wireless headphones
• Accessories: Amazon Premium Pen (never needs charging)
• Waterproofing: None – keep it well away from the bath or pool

Design

One of the biggest surprises when you pull this 11-inch device out of the box is how light it feels in your hands. Yes, it's big. But I carried it around in my bag all day long while waiting between hospital appointments, and I never once felt like I was lugging something heavy around with me. It's actually very similar in size to an average hardcover book, but so much thinner and lighter. I'd choose this over a hardback and my notebook any day.

Very quickly, the Kindle Scribe Colorsoft became a natural part of my daily routine: reading in bed, scribbling quick lists without social media or work notifications interrupting me, and keeping my entire life organised in one place. Best of all, the battery life is measured in weeks, not days. That alone is almost worth the price tag.

However, keeping my new device to myself has proved impossible. Within 24 hours of unboxing it, my daughter and her friends completely hijacked it, losing hours to doodling and sketching with the new colour-palette features. Then, my 21-year-old son popped home from university for a quick visit and instantly remarked on how 'clean' the digital notebook interface was for importing lecture documents. It hasn't been seen since he left to head back to his student accommodation. I am equal parts heartbroken – I had just really started to fall in love with it – and delighted that he's found a device that seems to inspire him to knuckle down for exam season.

What's it like to use?

If you’re coming from a tiny, outdated Kindle model, this screen feels like a massive revelation. The 11-inch glare-free panel is incredibly easy on the eyes, making it ideal for deep, late-night reading sessions without the usual eye fatigue.

I’ve been reading (and listening to) Ann Patchett's Tom Lake, and this is where the upgraded hardware really clicked. Being able to seamlessly switch between reading text and listening to the audiobook via Bluetooth headphones makes the entire story feel completely flexible and immersive.

What does 'Colorsoft' actually add?

Do not expect an iPad-level glowing screen. The color display here is intentionally subtle and muted, but that completely suits the gentle, paper-like aesthetic of a Kindle. Where it works best is adding a pop of functional joy to your routine:

Highlighting research, manuscript notes, or text snippets in distinct, separate colors.

Navigating illustrated lifestyle content, travel guides, and cookbooks.

Reviewing full-color book covers in your personal library layout.

Writing and journaling: Can it replace your notebook?

This is the exact feature that sets the Scribe apart from standard e-readers. I’m currently trying to write a novel, and being able to annotate my manuscript directly on the display has made a noticeable difference to my weekly word count and overall productivity.

There’s something unique about marking up your work—even digitally—that helps you think more clearly about edits. Reviewing and revising text on the Scribe feels more intentional than typing away on a laptop keyboard; it brings me back to how I’d work on real paper. Beyond drafting, it has completely taken over my daily to-do lists, evening journaling, and messy brainstorming sessions.

Amazon includes their Premium Pen right in the box, and it's a massive selling point: it utilizes passive tech so it never needs to be plugged in or charged, features a customizable shortcut button, and has a top-end dome that acts as a natural physical eraser.

The Niche: It sits perfectly in the middle of your tech tools. It is infinitely more focused than your phone, more organized than loose sheets of paper, yet retains that tactile, deliberate flow of a pen.

Verdict: Is it worth it?

A thousand times, yes.

Now. If you just want to read standard fiction novels before bed, you should probably save your money – the standard, budget-friendly Kindle Paperwhite is still the better value for simple text.

But if you are facing a sunsetting old device, read regularly, write or journal often, and want a beautiful, distraction-free way to reduce your daily phone screen time (or need a premium study tool to tempt your university student into studying), the Kindle Scribe Colorsoft is a genuinely useful, utterly enjoyable compromise. It hasn't completely replaced my paper notebooks – and I don't think anything ever will – but it has come closer than any other piece of technology I’ve ever tried.

This isn't a flawless device. The biggest downside? Out of the box, it instantly needs a protective cover – and the official Amazon cases are priced at over £100, which feels like a lot to shell out on top of an already very expensive, luxury piece of hardware.

Additionally – and crucially if you plan to travel with it or take it on holiday – the Scribe Colorsoft does not have a waterproof rating. Unlike the smaller Kindle Paperwhite models, this massive tablet cannot handle a drop into the pool or a splash by the sea, so you will want to keep it safely tucked inside your bag away from the water.

How does it compare?

How we test e-Readers & digital notebooks

Our team puts every digital notebook through rigorous real-world testing. We don't just test them at an office desk; we take them on our daily commutes, sketch with them outdoors in direct sunlight, and use them for extensive evening journaling sessions to evaluate screen glare, pen latency, palm rejection accuracy, cloud integration with Google Drive/OneDrive, and true battery longevity over several weeks of heavy usage.

After reconfiguring my kitchen a few years back, I sacrificed fridge/freezer space for extra countertop and a breakfast bar. At the time, having a minuscule freezer at the top of the under-counter fridge was fine, but now I have a dog and his food takes up all the space. No more iced coffees or crisp, cold gin and tonics...until now.

Friends of mine had an ice maker to help provide extra ice when they entertained over Christmas. Seeing it in action made me want one for my own home. It's safe to say I have absolutely zero regrets about copying.

Now that I have the nifty Daewoo Ice Maker on my counter, I can enjoy ice in as little as seven minutes. From cooling drinks to helping keep the dog cool, it's already proved its worth in this first week alone.

Daewoo Ice Maker review

• RRP: £89.99 £79.99
• Dimensions: H29 x W22.2 x D29.4 cm
• Weight: 6 kg
• Water tank capacity: 1.2 litres (maximum)
• Ice settings: 2
• Ice cube sizes: Small, Large
• Voltage: 220-240V
• Cleaning functions: Automatic self-cleaning
• Corded: Cable length of 1.2m
• Warranty: 3 years

Who would the Daewoo Ice Maker suit?

• Anyone struggling to stay cool in the heat: Iced drinks are invaluable when temperatures are high to help you stay suitably hydrated and stay cool.
• Homeowners with small kitchens: If your kitchen only has a small under-the-counter fridge, the freezer compartment will be limited. Although this appliance lives on the countertop, its compact design ensures it takes up minimal space (less than most air fryers)
• Those who want fast results: When you freeze water in an ice tray, you have to allow 3 to 4 hours, but with this machine, you get your first batch of 'small ice cubes' in 7 minutes. 8 minutes to get a batch of 'large ice cubes'.
• People who need a portable solution: Complete with a detachable handle, this machine is fully portable (to anywhere with mains to plug it in). Meaning it's ideal for those who want the freedom to set up an ice machine outside the constraints of a kitchen – for instance, in an outdoor kitchen or a dining room for entertaining.

This compact ice cube-making machine would suit all kinds of households. It's perfect for those who don't have a freezer at all, or those who need extra ice for entertaining.

It's also ideal for those who, like me, have no patience and want quick results. Forget asking Google how long it takes to freeze water in an ice tray and potentially spilling water all over the kitchen in the process; this machine takes less than 10 minutes to get results. This also makes it ideal for those who want ease – no planning or filling up trays required.

What is the Daewoo Ice Maker like to use?

It's a breeze. The beauty of this appliance also lies in how easy it is to use. You simply fill the water tank, then switch it on using the 'press buttons'. They are all clearly labelled and intuitive to use. When the water tank is empty, the red light shows on the control panel at the top to alert you that it requires topping up.

The scoop makes it super easy to serve the ice as it starts to fill the tray. Once the tray is full, the red 'Ice Full' indicator button will illuminate on the top. The removable ice cube tray makes for easy serving, and the carry handle makes it fully portable.

The low noise operation makes it barely detectable when in use.

The only slightly frustrating aspect is that it states in the manual that it has to be emptied after every use: "Do not allow water to sit in the tank, empty after every use." Given that it weighs 6kg and has a lid, it is a little tricky to empty; an extra pair of hands does come in handy to help make the process less awkward. But if you make and use all the ice, this isn't even a problem.

Should you buy the Daewoo Ice Maker?

If you want ice at the touch of a button, yes. If you want ice in under 10 minutes but don't have a freezer to store a bag bought from the supermarket, then yes.

If you are entertaining and need extra ice for serving cooling drinks, yes. If you want the flexibility to move the ice cube maker from room to room, yes – this is the one for you.

When a heatwave hits, it's all too tempting to rush out and buy the cheapest fan you can find. And whilst budget fans certainly have their place, when you're trying to stay cool through a sticky summer night, you'll quickly appreciate the difference that a more substantial model - especially the Meaco Sefte 6" Portable Fan - can make,

If you've spent any time researching the best cooling fans, chances are you've already come across the Meaco Sefte range, especially this compact 6-inch model. Despite its modest size, it's built an almost cult-like following among experts thanks to its impressive combination of cooling power and whisper-quiet operation. In our tests, it outperformed some of the biggest names in the business, including even some of the best Shark fans, particularly when it came to balancing airflow with noise levels.

The reasons this little fan gets so much love for keeping your home cool during a heatwave are almost too numerous to list. It's portable, working just as well in the garden as it does on your desk or bedside table; it's surprisingly powerful for its size; and at its quietest settings, it's so silent that some sound meters struggle to detect it. Add in its compact footprint, which lets it slot neatly under kitchen cupboards and into small bedrooms, and it's easy to see why this is the fan I'd recommend before you spend your money on a cheap impulse purchase.

MeacoFan Sefte 6" Portable Battery Air Circulator Fan review

• RRP: £69.99
• Dimensions: 324 x 210 x 180 mm
• Weight: 1.7 kg
• Speed settings: 12
• Oscillation: 70° (horizontal), 70° (vertical)
• Modes: normal, night, eco
• Sound: Minimum 22 dB
• Airflow read: 16m (length of a lorry)
• Corded: rechargeable and replaceable battery, cable length of 1.2m
• Timer: 12 hours
• Battery run time: up to 27 hours (charge of up to 3)
• Warranty: 3 years

Who would the Meaco Sefte 6” Fan suit?

I've already waxed lyrical about the Meaco Sefte 6" Fan, but if you want to check that this is the right fan for you, here's a quick summary of the real deciding factors for who it would suit:

• Anyone struggling to sleep in the heat - this sites neatly on a bedside table and is quiet enough not to disrupt even the lightest sleeper
• People who need a portable fan - this is cordless, so can go inside, outside, to the kitchen and back with you
• Those who want fast, powerful cooling - Meaco are experts in air circulation and this is one of the most powerful, coolest fans on the market

If you're looking for relief from hot flushes, night sweats, or simply struggling to sleep through the current heatwave, this fan makes a compelling case for itself. There are lots of features that make the Meaco bedroom friendly: a night mode turns off any bleeps and lights that might wake you up, the fan speed is almost silent, so you wouldn't be kept up by noise, and the remote works effectively from bed. You don't need to angle your hand or arm at all - the sensors are cleverly placed to avoid that.

Whilst the Meaco can be used plugged in for an infinite amount of time, if you can't bear to be separated from yours, or you want to take yours outdoors, this can be used as a cordless, portable fan. On its lowest setting, you can have it running for up to 26.5 hours before it will need to be plugged into a socket for charging - and it runs instantly then anyway. It might look heavy, but at just 1.7kgs, it's easy to carry from room to room.

There's also no way of escaping just how powerful this is. The lowest setting is a nice, gentle breeze that would only ripple a piece of paper, but on full whack, it could blow you away. The throw is actually the distance of a full lorry (16m). It's incredible.

What is the Meaco Sefte 6” Fan like to use?

I've tested plenty of fans over the years, and the first thing that struck me about the Sefte 6" was how much airflow it produces for its size. During this heatwave, I've found myself reaching for it constantly because it delivers immediate, close-range cooling exactly where you need it. On my desk, it kept me comfortable through long afternoons of writing without drying my eyes out, while on my bedside table it created enough airflow to keep my bedroom cool while I slept, stopping that sticky, overheated feeling that can make falling asleep so difficult.

The controls are also really straightforward: it offers 12 speeds, a clear digital display and useful extras like Night mode and a timer. You can either control the Sefte from the base of the fan, with clearly labelled buttons and a digital display, but you can also use the magnetic remote. This sits in the middle of the fan when you don't need it, but is also the right side for the palm of your hand. Meaco have also positioned the sensors so you don't need to reach funny angles to get the fan to respond: it'll pick up your request from almost any angle.

It's also really nice to be able to switch off the display lights and mute the button sounds completely. It's a little detail, but when you're trying to drift off during a hot night, every little helps.

At 1.7kgs, it's not a stretch to call the Sefte portable. Of course, it's not going to si in your bag on a commute, unless you're desperate, but it's easy to carry around the house, using the handle. I didn't think twice about carrying it with me outside for lunch, bringing it down to the kitchen when I'm cooking, and then taking it upstairs at night.

I often used it plugged in, because I didn't want to run out of charge, but it has nearly 27 hours of battery life. This is really handy if you wanted to sit the Meaco, for example, on a bookshelf or at a particular angle that isn't near a plug, because you don't need to worry about it running out of battery. As soon as it's plugged in, you can have the fan running instantly.

Should you buy the Meaco Sefte 6” Cooling Fan?

In the midst of a heatwave, it’s easy to panic buy a fan to “just get the job done”, but the Meaco Sefte isn’t a gap filler. This is an investment you’ll recommend, boast about, and use for years to come. You can thank us later.

Vans Brooklyn trainers were initially created as a men's shoe, but the style was so popular that the brand decided to release a women's version of the cool canvas and suede design.

While I love wearing my best white trainers with pretty floral summer dresses, a pair of dark trainers is definitely a capsule wardrobe must-have, particularly for the cooler months. Thanks to the pared-back, minimalist design, this black-and-white style is great for teaming with smart tailoring or jeans.

With a slightly chunkier profile than the classic Vans Old Skool trainers, Vans Brooklyn trainers are a great option if you're after Adidas Samba alternatives that offer a more cushioned sole and wider toe.

Vans Brooklyn trainers are extremely comfortable as they have a wider toe cap shape, which allows for more wiggle room. The shoe also benefits from the brand's skate shoe know-how, offering a cushioned sole that really will put a spring in your step.

Shop the trainers

Vans Brooklyn trainers: comfort & support

Thanks to their heritage as a skate shoe company, Vans trainers are known for making comfortable trainers. All of their styles include a supportive sole that helps protect your foot by cushioning it from impact with a flexible yet supportive sole. Vans Brooklyn trainers also include an ankle cuff that is more padded than other styles, meaning that your heel is protected and the shoe needs less wearing in than some other trainers.

The shoes themselves are not too heavy, so you can wear them for long stretches without feeling weighed down, thanks to the combination of suede and canvas upper materials. This dual fabric upper also contributes to a lighter shoe weight than full-suede upper styles and allows for an easy wearing-in period. Thanks to these two natural materials, the Vans Brooklyn trainer offers a degree of breathability, despite not having vents.

When it comes to sizing, Vans Brooklyn trainers are mostly true to size, but you might find that for some variants, such as the platform style, sizing down by half a size will help the fit, as the sole has less give.

However, there is one crucial aspect to consider when purchasing a pair of Vans Brooklyn trainers - unlike Adidas Sambas, Gazelles and Handball Spezials, this style lacks in-built arch support and has a completely flat footbed inner. This could affect your comfort if you're on your feet for long periods of time or have flat feet and need additional arch support.

Vans Brooklyn Trainers: Style

When it comes to stylish designs, Vans Brooklyn trainers have a cool, pared-back aesthetic. The classic monochrome colour combination fits seamlessly with a selection of outfits while the low-profile shape finishes under the ankle, creating a flattering cut.

Despite the wider, more rounded toe cap, the canvas and suede upper add minimal bulk to your foot, so they feel slick and streamlined, while the white sole gives them a lighter look.

It's not just the classic black-and-white combination that's available, either - there are fully black or fully white versions perfect for wearing with your favourite white jeans outfits.

For those who prefer colourful trainers, the design is also available in a variety of seasonal colours, ranging from burgundy and pink to beige and green colourways, so you're sure to find a pair for every summer outfit idea.

Vans Brooklyn Trainers: Cleaning & Care

With suede leather detailing on the uppers of the Vans Brooklyn trainers, it's generally not recommended to machine wash this style. Instead, it's best to carefully spot-wash stains, using a dry brush to lift out dirt before applying any liquids.

However, if your trainers are heavily soiled, there are steps you can take to minimise damage from a washing machine. First, using a suede brush or old toothbrush, give them a gentle brush to remove the worst of any dried-in stains. If your shoes are muddy, allow them to dry first before brushing to avoid pushing the stain deeper into the fabric or spreading it wider.

If you need to loosen any baked-on stains on the canvas areas, try using a bristle brush such as a toothbrush on the hard-wearing fabric to lift out the worst and then remove the laces and insoles, but don’t forget to add them to your wash too! You may want to give white laces a gentle soak in a whitening cleanser before placing them in a net bag to avoid tangling.

When putting your shoes in the washing machine, it’s best to place them into a mesh bag inside the very middle of a full wash to prevent any damage to the drum. Sheets or towels are a good option as they will fill the drum, adding a protective cushion.

It's best to wash your shoes on a cooler wash, as hot temperatures can cause the rubber to warp and the glue holding the shoes together to deteriorate.

After they’re washed, stuff the toes with newspaper or something similar to help them retain their shape and stop the fabrics from shrinking. Leave them somewhere warm to dry naturally - never place your shoes in the tumble dryer as the heat will cause them to shrink and warp.

Vans Brooklyn Trainers: How we tested them

There's no better way to test trainers than to wear them - I donned a pair of Vans Brooklyn Trainers for a week to see if they lived up to their bestselling hype, and after a brief breaking-in period, I was blown away by their comfort.

My top tip is to swap Millennial favourite hidden socks for a pair of retro mid-calf sports socks - this thicker style will help buffer against any initial rubbing at your Achilles and around the heel and help them soften up quickly.

I wore my pair for a variety of events - from running around town on appointments, errands and meetings to day-to-day tasks such as the school run and was surprised at just how comfortable they were, the canvas and suede quickly moulding to my feet.

My only bugbear? The overly long laces - I'll be swapping them over for the elastic shoelace hack that has changed all of my trainers for the better.

Shop more Vans

Vans Brooklyn Trainers: Verdict

With an incredibly affordable price tag and comfortable fit, Vans Brooklyn trainers are an excellent style to add to your wardrobe.

Their classic, low-key style makes them the perfect addition to every wardrobe and their versatility is a definite plus, particularly if you’re packing for a mini break or hand luggage only.

While they might need a little bit of breaking in, once they’ve moulded to your foot they are extremely comfortable, even for those spending a whole day on their feet.

Everyone is talking about stainless steel food containers. They solve a lot of problems, especially as a simple, non-toxic alternative to plastic or heavy glass tubs - and don't break the bank in the process either. But which ones are the best? And should you make the switch?

I love my stainless steel pans, but investing in stainless steel food containers hadn't crossed my mind until I spotted this £5 IKEA launch. After doing some research, I convinced myself to overhaul my whole kitchen in favour of this set, because, unlike plastic, stainless steel won't absorb stains, odours, or flavours, and they're free from the chemical concerns that have prompted many people to rethink storing food in plastic altogether.

And while glass food storage containers also make sense if you're clumsy or looking for something that's a little lighter, stainless steel is a practical option. Stainless steel can also go in the fridge, freezer and oven, replacing dishes and tins too. After months of testing them in my own kitchen, I'm convinced they're one of the smartest, most versatile upgrades you can make, especially if you're looking to save space and simplify your cupboards while reducing your reliance on plastic.

IKEA's Stainless Steel Food Storage Containers

If you've been trying to create a more non-toxic home, you'll probably have noticed that many people are swapping plastic food containers for glass. One of the main reasons is that some plastics can degrade over time, particularly when exposed to heat, scratches, or repeated use, potentially increasing the migration of chemicals into food. Concerns around PFAS ("forever chemicals") have also prompted many households to take a closer look at the materials they use every day, switching to non-toxic air fryers as well as stainless steel pans.

For a long time, I thought glass was the obvious solution. It's non-reactive, easy to clean, and lets you see exactly what's inside. My family still prefers the reassuring heft and transparency of glass containers. However, the problem with me is that I'm constantly dropping things. More than once, I've shattered a food container on the kitchen floor, and I found carrying several glass containers in my work bag or picnic basket surprisingly heavy.

That's what led me to stainless steel food storage containers, and I think they're one of the most underrated kitchen upgrades I've made. High-quality food-grade stainless steel is durable, corrosion-resistant, and non-reactive, which means it won't absorb flavours, stains, or odours from your food. Unlike plastic, it won't warp or become discoloured over time, and unlike glass, it can survive being dropped without turning your kitchen floor into a hazard zone.

Stainless steel is also surprisingly versatile. Many of the containers I've tested are oven-safe, freezer-safe, fridge-safe, and dishwasher-safe. I've used them to bake traybakes, store leftovers, freeze meal-prep portions, set homemade jellies, and even make ice cream. Instead of needing separate baking tins, storage tubs, and lunchboxes, one container can do the job of all three, which is a surprisingly effective space-saving trick in a small kitchen.

They're also ideal for packed lunches and batch cooking. The models I recommend have airtight, leakproof lids that make them easy to throw into a handbag, gym bag, or backpack without worrying about spills. Some premium options, including designs from Black+Blum, even feature vacuum-release valves that help create a more airtight seal, keeping food fresher for longer.

After making the switch from plastic to glass, and now from glass to stainless steel, I feel like I've found the sweet spot. Stainless steel gives me the peace of mind I was looking for, without the fragility and weight of glass. It doesn't stain after storing tomato-based sauces, it doesn't retain lingering food smells, and despite what some people assume, it doesn't leave food tasting metallic either.

The only real downside is that stainless steel can't go in the microwave. For me, that's a compromise I'm happy to make. Durable, lightweight, versatile, and surprisingly affordable, these containers have earned a permanent place in my kitchen. It's a simple swap that I wish I'd discovered years ago. And if you're thinking about reducing your reliance on plastic, there's never been a better time to make the switch.

If you've been eyeing up a Kindle but wish it offered a little more freedom, the BOOX Go series is, almost certainly, exactly what you're looking for. It delivers everything most readers love about Amazon's eReaders: a crisp, paper-like display, weeks-long battery life, and distraction-free reading experience. However, you also get the bonus of more flexibility in terms of what you can download and how. Most notably, it brings back physical page-turn buttons, a feature readers (especially me) have missed ever since the Kindle Oasis disappeared from shelves.

What makes the BOOX Go stand out against the best Kindles is how effortlessly it adapts to different reading styles. Its ergonomic, palm-shaped design sits comfortably in one hand, making it ideal for reading on the sofa, commuting, or winding down in bed. The customisable front light lets you tweak both brightness and warmth to create a softer, more comfortable reading experience, whether you're enjoying a beach read in bright daylight or settling into a novel before sleep. Better still, you're not tied to a single bookstore for finding all your best reads of the month. Alongside your own EPUB library, you can download reading apps from multiple retailers, giving you access to a far wider range of books and subscriptions than a Kindle alone.

Yet the BOOX Go isn't just an eReader. You can organise books into shelves and folders, track your reading habits with detailed graphs, switch into a dedicated notes mode when inspiration strikes, and even hand it over to younger readers thanks to its built-in Kids Mode. Last year, I tried swapping my Kindle for a Kobo and this year, I've braved the BOOX. Does this prove that there's life beyond the Kindle?

BOOX Go eReader Colour Gen 2 review

• RRP: £269.99
• Screen size: 7 inches
• Display resolution: 300 dpi in Black 150 dpi in Color
• Operating system: Android
• Front light: TM (Warm and Cold) G-sensor for Auto Rotation
• Document formats: PDF, CAJ, DJVU, CBR, CBZ, EPUB, EPUB3, AZW3, MOBI, TXT, DOC, DOCX, FB2, CHM, RTF, HTML, ZIP, PRC, PPT, PPTX Image Formats: PNG, JPG, BMP, TIFF Audio Formats: WAV, MP3 Supports 3rd-party apps
• Charging port: USB-C
• Memory storage: 64 GB

Who would the BOOX Go Colour Gen 2 eReader suit?

The BOOX Go won't be the right eReader for everyone, but that's exactly what makes it so appealing. If you're perfectly happy buying all your books from Amazon and never venturing outside the Kindle ecosystem, a Kindle Paperwhite will probably do everything you need. However, if you've ever been frustrated by Amazon's limitations or wished your eReader could do a little more, the BOOX Go should absolutely have a spot on your shelf.

I think this will particularly appeal to avid readers who borrow books from different sources, buy from multiple bookshops, and have accumulated a library of EPUB files over the years. I loved not feeling tied to a single retailer. Instead, I could access my existing collection and download reading apps from various stores, giving me far more flexibility than a Kindle offers.

It's also an excellent option for anyone still mourning the loss of the Kindle Oasis. As someone who reads one-handed while curled up on the sofa, walking on a treadmill, or balancing a cup of tea in the other hand, I really appreciated having physical page-turn buttons again. It's a small feature, once adored on the Kindle Oasis, so has a bit of a cul following.

Parents will appreciate the Kids Mode, while readers who like to annotate, jot down ideas, or keep track of their reading habits will enjoy the extra productivity features. Ultimately, this is an eReader for people who love reading enough to want a device that works around their habits rather than forcing them into a particular ecosystem.

What is the BOOX Go Colour Gen 2 eReader like to use?

From the moment I picked up the BOOX Go, it felt noticeably different to most eReaders I've tested. The asymmetrical, palm-shaped design isn't just there for aesthetics; it makes the device easier to hold. The wider grip section sits comfortably in your hand, while the screen remains balanced, so your wrist doesn't feel strained during longer reading sessions.

That design works brilliantly alongside the physical page-turn buttons. I hadn't realised how much I missed them until I started using the BOOX Go. Whether I was reading in bed, lounging on the sofa, or squeezing in a few chapters during my commute, being able to turn pages without constantly reaching for the touchscreen made the whole experience feel more natural and immersive.

Despite offering considerably more functionality than a Kindle, the BOOX Go never felt intimidating to navigate. The bottom navigation bar keeps everything within easy reach, with dedicated sections for your library, the app store, storage, apps, and settings. Within a few minutes, I felt comfortable moving between books, downloading apps, and customising the reading experience.

Organisation is another area where the BOOX Go excels. I was able to create bookshelves and folders to keep my growing library tidy, which is particularly useful if, like me, your reading tastes jump between contemporary fiction, cookbooks, biographies, and professional reading. Instead of endlessly scrolling through a long list of titles, everything can sta neatly organised and easy to find.

Features and functions on the BOOX Go Colour Gen 2 eReader

One of the biggest advantages of the BOOX Go is that it feels far more versatile than a traditional eReader. At its core, it's still designed around reading, but there are countless ways to tailor the experience to suit your preferences.

The library section acts as the central hub for your books, whether you've purchased them through an app, downloaded them from another retailer, or transferred EPUB files directly onto the device. I particularly liked how easy it was to manage books from different sources without feeling locked into a single platform.

For readers who enjoy tracking their habits, the BOOX Go includes detailed reading statistics and graphs that show your progress over time. It's a feature that I didn't think I'd care about, but I quickly found myself checking how many hours I'd spent reading each week, celebrating my progress through longer books, and getting competitive with myself.

The front light is also impressively customisable. Beyond simple brightness controls, you can adjust the warmth of the light to create a softer, more comfortable reading experience. I often found myself dialling down the brightness and increasing the warmth before bed, creating a gentler glow that felt much kinder on tired eyes.

It’s also worth noting that this comes with a colour screen, so you don’t need to compromise on your reading. For the average paperback peruser, a colour screen just means seeing the cover in its original form. However, if you read non-fiction, cookbooks, gardening books, and any magazines, having a colour screen brings the e-reader to life. It definitely comes closer to bridging the gap between books and e-readers.

Beyond reading, the BOOX Go offers a suite of apps and tools that make it feel closer to a lightweight productivity device. Pre-installed apps include Dropbox, a dictionary, calendar, calculator, clock, recorder, browser, music player, gallery, and AI assistant. There's also access to the Google Play Store, opening up a huge range of additional reading and productivity apps.

I particularly liked the Quick Notes feature, which makes it easy to capture thoughts, shopping lists, reading notes, or ideas without reaching for another device. Combined with the Kids Mode and extensive customisation options, the BOOX Go manages to feel useful far beyond simply reading books.

Battery and display on the BOOX Go Colour Gen 2 eReader

The screen is one of the areas where the BOOX Go really shines. Text looks wonderfully crisp and sharp, with that paper-like quality that makes dedicated eReaders so much more comfortable to use than phones or tablets. Even after several hours of reading, I experienced none of the eye fatigue that often accompanies brighter LCD displays.

Colour performance is equally impressive. While it's not intended to completely compete with a tablet, illustrations, book covers, magazines, and graphic novels all look vibrant enough to add another dimension to the reading experience. The colours appear natural rather than oversaturated, which suits the e-ink display perfectly.

I also appreciated just how customisable the screen felt. The adjustable front light allows you to fine-tune both brightness and warmth, while the softer light settings create a calming atmosphere for bedtime reading. It's a small touch, but one that makes the BOOX Go feel particularly thoughtful for readers who enjoy unwinding with a book at the end of the day.

Battery life is another major strength. Throughout testing, I found myself charging the BOOX Go remarkably infrequently. Even with regular reading sessions, experimenting with apps, and using the front light, the battery seemed to drain at a reassuringly slow pace. Unlike a phone or tablet, which often requires daily charging, this is a device you can happily take away for a weekend or holiday without packing the charger.

How does the BOOX Go eReader Colour Gen 2 compare?

The BOOX Go occupies an interesting space in the eReader market because it doesn't try to beat Kindle at being a Kindle. Instead, it offers an alternative vision of what an eReader can be.

Compared with the Kindle Paperwhite, the BOOX Go provides considerably more freedom. You're not restricted to Amazon's bookshop, you can download apps through the Google Play Store, and physical page-turn buttons make one-handed reading much easier. Readers with existing EPUB libraries will also appreciate how straightforward it is to access books from multiple sources.

Where Kindle still has the advantage is simplicity. Amazon's setup process is incredibly streamlined, and if you already buy all your books through Amazon, everything works seamlessly from the moment you switch the device on. The BOOX Go asks a little more of its users initially, simply because there are more options to explore and customise.

That said, I never found the extra complexity overwhelming. In fact, once I'd spent a little time familiarising myself with the menus and settings, I preferred having the additional flexibility. The BOOX Go feels less restrictive and more adaptable, particularly for readers who don't want one company dictating where they buy their books.

Should you buy the BOOX Go Colour Gen 2 eReader?

If you're looking for the simplest possible eReader and already live comfortably within Amazon's ecosystem, a Kindle will still be the easiest choice. But if you've ever wished your eReader offered more flexibility, more customisation, and more freedom over where you get your books, the BOOX Go is a genuinely compelling alternative.

After testing it, what impressed me most wasn't any single feature but how thoughtfully everything works together. The ergonomic design makes it comfortable to hold, the page-turn buttons make reading more enjoyable, the screen is crisp and customisable, and the ability to access multiple bookstores removes many of the frustrations I've experienced with more restrictive devices.

For keen readers, former Kindle Oasis devotees, and anyone who values choice over convenience, the BOOX Go strikes a rare balance between dedicated reading device and everyday companion. It's versatile without being distracting, powerful without feeling complicated, and proof that there's life beyond Kindle.

How we test eReaders

At woman&home, we're a bunch of bookworms, which means we love testing, talking, and reading everything that we can. We started off testing Kindles when they were brand new and a real novelty. Since then, we've seen them grow into tablets, we've seen older models retire, and competitors to Amazon's own brand rise up in the ranks.

How we test each e-reader is really simple. One of our book worms (usually me), lives with the e-reader for months. In that time, it comes on commutes, long weekends, and always at least one holiday, so you get a good gauge of battery life, how it fares in an airport, and whether it's handbag friendly. From there, we can cover what it's like to read from in the sun, snuggle up in bed with, and make notes all over. Extra features are always put to the test, as are the basics. We like to make sure we cover every avenue before presenting you with a review, but if you still have questions, don't hesitate to email me.

It's only been a couple of months since Dyson launched the HushJet Mini Cool Fan, but we've already had heatwaves, holidays, and plenty of occasions when a personal fan has felt less like a luxury and more like a necessity. In that time, I've been lucky enough to spend that time testing the Dyson, and I've really put it through its paces for you.

Shopping for a portable fan often means making compromises. There are plenty of budget-friendly options on Amazon for around £20, but they tend to sacrifice power, battery life, or build quality. At the other end of the spectrum are premium cooling fans, including the much-talked-about Shark ChillPill, which cost considerably more. Having lived with this since its launch, the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool Fan has been working hard to prove that a premium portable fan can be worth the investment.

I liked the look of the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool Fan when it launched, but now I've taken mine on holiday to Greece, carried it in my bag during hot commutes, and even brought it to the gym when the air conditioning broke. After months of real-world testing, the question is simple: is Dyson's latest portable fan worth the money?

Dyson HushJet Mini Cool Fan review

• Weight: 212g (less than a cup of coffee)
• Battery life: up to 6-hour
• Airflow speeds: up to 25m/s (feeling of a severe violent galeforce wind)
• Airflow settings: 5 plus boost
• Motor: brushless DC motor spins at 65,000 RPM
• Sound: 72.5 dBA in boost mode, 68dBA in speed 5, 52dBA in speed 1
• Uses: handheld, wearable, or desk-mounted
• Accessories: Neck Dock, travel pouch, grip clip
• Charging: USB-C
• Colours: stone/blush, camelian/sky, ink/cobalt

Who would the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool Fan suit?

The Dyson HushJet Mini Cool Fan is best suited to people who are regularly on the move and want reliable cooling wherever they go. Whether you're commuting on packed trains, travelling abroad, working in stuffy offices, or spending long days at sporting events and festivals, its compact size and impressive airflow make it easy to keep close at hand.

It's particularly good for anyone who struggles with overheating, particularly during the summer months. If hot flushes, warm nights, or crowded public spaces leave you feeling uncomfortable, the HushJet delivers targeted cooling without the bulk of a traditional desk fan. I could get some sweet relief when climbing a hill in sticky 32 °C and lent this to my mum when we were travelling and she was suffering from hot flushes. We agreed that it is worth keeping in a handbag for those hot and flustered occasions.

That being said, its premium price means it's unlikely to appeal to occasional users. If you only reach for a fan during the odd heatwave, a cheaper alternative will probably suffice. The Dyson definitely has more power and can make a noticeable difference, but played against the price, it only makes sense if staying cool is a daily concern.

What is the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool Fan like to use?

I didn't expect to get much use out of the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool Fan when it landed on my desk in April. Spring had been typically grey and drizzly, and a portable fan felt like a niche luxury rather than an essential. Then came the heatwaves. Over the past few months, I've taken this fan everywhere: on holiday to Greece, on packed Tube journeys, to the gym during an air conditioning failure, and around London during some seriously sticky summer days. It's had far more real-world testing than I ever anticipated.

Before getting into performance, it's worth looking at the design. In the box, Dyson includes a desktop stand, a neck strap, and a neatly packaged USB-C charging cable. This immediately gives you a sense of the fan's intended versatility. You can prop it up on a desk while working, wear it hands-free when walking, or hold it like a traditional handheld fan. I tested the ceramic pink finish, which feels distinctly Dyson: sleek, modern, and premium. There are other colourways available, but all share the same minimalist aesthetic that's become synonymous with the brand.

The fan head can be tilted to direct airflow where you need it most. It doesn't offer full 360-degree articulation, but in practice I never found that limiting. The range of movement was enough to angle air towards my face while working at a desk and then redirect it upwards when worn around my neck. During testing, I found myself adjusting the angle regularly depending on whether I was sitting, standing, or walking, and the mechanism felt reassuringly sturdy rather than flimsy.

Operation the Dyson is really simple and straightforward. Five speed settings are controlled via the buttons on the front, with LED indicators showing the selected power level. What's impressive is how much airflow Dyson has managed to generate from such a compact unit. At lower settings, the fan is quiet enough to disappear into the background while you're working. Even at higher speeds, I found the sound more of a concentrated rush of air than an irritating mechanical whirr. I used it extensively on public transport and never felt self-conscious. The only occasion where the noise felt slightly intrusive was during a guided walking tour in Greece, where the combination of maximum fan speed and a quiet group setting made it more noticeable and so I had to go back to non-mechanical fanning.

The battery life is an element that makes a premium fan really stand out from the £20 options. During everyday use, switching between speeds throughout the day, carrying it on commutes, and using it intermittently while working, I rarely found myself reaching for the charger. The only time I managed to fully drain the battery in a day was during a particularly demanding test: a heatwave gym session where the air conditioning had broken. I walked to the gym with the fan running, used it throughout my workout on its highest setting, and kept it on for the journey home. It eventually ran out towards the end of the morning, which felt like a fair result given how hard I'd pushed it.

As with many of Dyson's recent launches, the engineering will feel familiar. The HushJet Mini shares the brand's signature 32mm cylindrical design language, which you'll recognise from its hair tools and the PencilVac. This makes the fan comfortable to hold for long periods, even for someone like me, with relatively small hands. One small tip from testing is that you'll want to avoid covering the air intake vents at the base of the handle. Doing so restricts airflow and noticeably reduces performance, so it's worth paying attention to how you're holding it if you want to get the most powerful cooling effect.

How does the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool Fan compare?

The obvious rival to the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool Fan is the Shark ChillPill. I've tested both, and while they're aiming for the same audience, they take slightly different approaches. The Shark is the more playful of the two, with a compact, colourful design; more functions, including misting and cold plates; and a higher price tag. It's a great option if you want something lightweight to throw in a handbag for serious cooling power.

The Dyson is a more simple and straightforward fan, which is why it's also cheaper too. The airflow isn't quite as strong on the highest setting and it's not quite as personalised for airflow, but the build quality is still premium. The Dyson, unlike the Shark comes with the accessories already, so your stand and neck strap can be included in the price. I also found myself reaching for the Dyson more when I was out and about, because I had the strap ready to go. However, when I was in more extreme heat environments and looking for a next level of cooling power, Shark was the one that I ended up choosing.

You can't go wrong with either: the Dyson is a premium option that focuses solely on airflow and the Shark is a more expensive, but also more versatile alternative.

Should you buy the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool Fan?

If you want a pretty, powerful, and premium fan to see you through heatwaves, holidays, and less predictable moments like hot flushes or stuffy commutes, the Dyson HushJet Mini Cool Fan makes a strong case for itself as a handbag essential rather than a novelty gadget. What sets it apart in testing is that it isn't only convenient, it consistently delivers usable, directed cooling in situations where most compact fans quickly fall short.

It’s this combination of portability and performance that makes it easy to justify carrying around. Whether it’s cooling down on a sun-drenched airport transfer, getting through a packed Tube carriage, or simply surviving a humid office day, it slips into daily life without feeling like extra baggage. It’s not the cheapest option, but if reliable personal cooling is something you reach for often rather than occasionally, it earns its place in your everyday carry.

When I agreed to review the Ultenic U20 cordless vacuum, I wasn't expecting it to outperform my Shark. And it didn't – I still reach for my trusty Shark after a day at the beach when the house is full of sand. But in between those deep clean days, a curious thing happened; I kept walking past the Shark and reaching for the Ultenic instead. Now, long after the official test period should have come to an end, the Ultenic U20 remains the vacuum I instinctively grab for everyday cleaning thanks to its lightweight design and ease of use.

At just over 3kg, the Ultenic U20 is almost 2kg lighter than my Shark. That might not sound like much, but in practice, it's the difference between 'I can't be bothered to vacuum right now' and 'I'll just quickly take this for a spin around the kitchen floor while the kettle boils'.

What I learned from testing the Ultenic U20 is that the best vacuum isn't necessarily the most powerful one. In a household like mine – five people, a dog and a cat, sand in places it shouldn’t be and mud that seems to appear out of nowhere – the best vacuum cleaner is the one that turns vacuuming into a quick and almost effortless job instead of a chore you'd rather avoid.

Ultenic U20 Cordless Vacuum review

• Price: £239.99
• Power: 600W motor
• Runtime: Up to 60 minutes
• Dustbin capacity: 1.5L
• Weight: Approx. 3.3kg
• Filtration: 7-stage filtration system with HEPA filter
• Brush head: TangleTame™ anti-hair wrap floor brush
• Technology: GreenEye dust-detect lighting system
• Included tools: Crevice tool, flat brush, flexible hose, HEPA filters, wall mount

Who would the Ultenic U20 suit?

Having used the Ultenic U20 vacuum for six months, I've got a good idea of who this would be perfect for. Whilst it won't replace a heavy-duty corded vacuum, the lightweight, simple cordless design makes it perfect for quick vacuuming tasks that you want to take on "little and often."

A surprising bonus of the Ultenic being cheaper is that it's made from lighter materials. So, if you struggle with yours up the stairs, or you get back and shoulder aches, this could be the vacuum that offers some light relief.

I was also surprised to find that it handles pet hair and the day-to-day mud tracked in by my family really well. It made for a brilliant helping hand around the home.

• small to medium-sized homes
• people who vacuum little and often
• someone who needs a vacuum that's easy on the wrists and shoulders
• anyone looking for a lighter cordless vacuum
• pet owners dealing with everyday hair rather than serious shedding

Unboxing and first impressions of the Ultenic U20 Cordless vacuum

I’ve only ever bought Shark or Dyson vacuums, which usually arrive in large, imposing boxes that aren't easy to lift. So I was initially surprised – and a little concerned – by how easily I could scoop up the box that arrived on my doorstep containing the Ultenic U20. I popped it in my office to open later, and it ended up staying there for more than a week, almost getting forgotten – it's that unobtrusive.

Once unboxed, setting up the vacuum couldn't have been easier. Forget scrutinising a lengthy instruction manual or struggling to work out which attachment goes where – it just all slots neatly together.

The freestanding design is one of the first things that impressed me about it – that's a premium feature I wouldn't expect on a budget vacuum at this price point, and it's a game-changer. If you've ever tried balancing a cordless vacuum against the wall while rescuing a stray sock from the path of destruction, you'll know exactly what I mean. My Shark can't compete on this point – it has a handy folding function for when you need to store it or pause to pick something up, but that suddenly seems fiddly compared to the ease with which the Ultenic stands elegantly in place.

The Ultenic U20 is packed with more features than I was expecting, too. With a 600W motor and up to 55kPa suction, it's not the most powerful vacuum on the block, but it does have plenty of extras that make up for that, including GreenEye lighting to highlight hidden dust, and a bendable wand to make it easy to clean under furniture.

What's the Ultenic U20 Cordless vacuumlike to use?

This is where the Ultenic U20 makes its strongest case. Having suffered from joint pain and tennis elbow (thanks to perimenopause), I've developed very little patience for heavy household appliances. It's bad enough that I have to vacuum the stairs so often in a never-ending battle against pet fur – but I refuse to do it with something unwieldy or annoyingly heavy. If we can send people to the moon, I'm sure we can make domestic appliances easier to lift and carry. The Ultenic U20 is proof of this. Its lightness is by far its biggest selling point.

The bendable wand is a feature I initially dismissed as a gimmick, but I have ended up loving. In the past, I always moved beds and sofas to vacuum under them and never understood people who didn't. With joints that think twice about helping with household chores, I've decided life's too short for that. Still, the thought of what might lurk under there gives me the ick, so it's genuinely helpful to be able to vacuum under furniture without worrying about slipping a disc in the process. Cleaning under furniture is a doddle thanks to a bendable wand – beneath my bed has never been so clean, and even the dog appreciates this vacuum's assistance with retrieving long-lost tennis balls from under the sofa.

The GreenEye light is surprisingly satisfying, too, especially in dark corners where it's harder to see exactly how filthy the floor is. Slightly horrifying, admittedly, but satisfying.

Suction-wise, it handled everyday family mess just fine. Dropped biscuits and toast crumbs, the aforementioned sand, endless pet hair, grass and muddy debris from golf shoes, football boots and mountain biking gear – all the glamorous realities of family life we could throw at it, the Ultenic U20 coped with it.

Is the Ultenic U20 good value for money?

Yes, at under £200 (and often discounted), the Ultenic U20 sits in a completely different price bracket to premium cordless vacuums from the likes of Shark and Dyson. That's why I was so keen to try it. I wanted to be able to answer whether a budget alternative to the best Dyson vacuums is ever worth it and, now, I think I have my answer.

It doesn’t outperform the likes of Dyson and Shark, but you can't really expect it to when it has plastic where they use metal and much less suction power. That's all wrapped up in the price though. What this does do an exceptional job of is quick, everyday cleaning. It's made easier, and more convenient by virtue of the light and simple design. And for many of us, that matters more than suction power.

Ultenic U20 vs Shark Cordless Vacuum

There's no contest when it comes to power: my Shark cordless vacuum is still the one I reach for when I'm in deep cleaning mode. It feels more robust and never fails to deliver that 'properly clean' feeling that no budget vacuum can compete with. Yet I found myself reaching for the Ultenic over the Shark nine times out of ten because it's just so quick and easy to use.

The difference in weight is obviously a huge factor. The Ultenic feels effortless to lift and carry between rooms, whereas I have to mentally commit to using the Shark. This really shows when it comes to vacuuming my carpeted quarter-turn stairs – the worst spot in my house for collecting pet hair. Using the Shark on the stairs is a bit of a workout that I dread, if I'm honest, but with the flat brush tool attached to the Ultenic, turning it into a compact, handheld vacuum, I can have the whole staircase fur-free in less time than it takes a pot of coffee to brew – without lugging a full-size vacuum up and down the stairs behind me.

In a busy household like mine, that level of convenience makes an enormous difference. I find myself zipping around with the Ultenic between other tasks without really thinking about it, which means the floors are looking cleaner day-to-day, and my weekly re-set of the house is much less of a mission, because I've kept on top of the vacuuming almost daily.

In a lab test, the Shark would easily win on deep-clean performance, but the Ultenic wins on convenience and ease of use – and in a real family home, I think that matters more than suction power.

Cleaning and maintenance on the Ultenic U20

I was a little apprehensive about what the Ultenic U20 vacuum would be like to clean, as cheaper vacuums often don't have the same simple features that make clearing hair and emptying the dust bin easy. First of all, the rollers surprised me. Dog hair and long hair didn't get wrapped around the roller and trapped, instead, they were whisked into the dustbin and emptied straight into my home bin. It was a great start from the Ultenic.

The actual dust bin isn't that much smaller than some Dyson and Shark models. And, because it's a little less powerful, I didn't notice that it needed changing any more or less. Of course, this does mean that it's probably picking up less dirt and mess, but not in a way that I noticed. And, as I said, if this is just for quick run arounds, that doesn't really matter.

Emptying the dust bin does require a bit of a knack and you might need a tool handy to really scrape any stubborn hair from the top. However, overall, it's all straightforward and relatively mess-free.

Should you buy the Ultenic U20?

My Shark isn't going anywhere; it's still the superior deep cleaner. But the Ultenic brought me something I didn't know I needed: relief from the mental resistance that surfaces at the thought of dragging a heavy vacuum out of the understairs cupboard day after day.

In this busy home where mess seems to constantly regenerate, no matter how often you vacuum, the Ultenic has earned its place for lightness and ease of use alone – and it's here to stay.

How I tested the Ultenic U20

Normally, we recruit a member of our Tester Network to review vacuum cleaners in their home, but I volunteered to review the Ultenic U20. My household is, frankly, brutal on vacuums: five people, a dog, a cat, endless foot traffic, beach sand that somehow migrates into every room and – thanks to a mountain-biking husband and a golf-mad son – mud that reappears moments after I’ve cleaned it up.

I tested the Ultenic U20 over several weeks on kitchen tiles, wood floors, carpets, rugs, stairs, upholstery and beneath furniture, using it for everything from quick kitchen clean-ups to more demanding Sunday night re-set sessions. I paid particular attention to how easy it was to grab for daily use, how well it coped with pet hair and other kinds of household debris, how manoeuvrable it was around furniture and winding stairs, and whether it could realistically compete with my more powerful Shark vacuum in real-world family life. I also tested all of the attachments, assessed battery life during longer cleans and discovered how it handled the kind of heavy-handed treatment that comes with living in a busy family household like mine.

You can find out more about how we test vacuums on our dedicated page.

Of all the people to rework one of Ninja’s most iconic coffee machines, David Beckham might not be the first name that comes to mind. Ninja has covered the technical side of coffee for over a decade, refining grind, extraction, and temperature control. What Beckham brings is something different, and, surprisingly valuable too. His changes are not surface-level styling exercises, they are small, deliberate upgrades that improve how the machine looks, feels, and lives in your kitchen day to day.

I was sceptical at first. What does David Beckham know about designing a coffee machine? It is a fair question, especially if you care about extraction, flavour balance, and consistency. After spending nearly six months using the machine he helped shape, I can say that the results speak for themselves. The core performance remains excellent, but the refinements around materials and finish make a noticeable difference in everyday use, and that is coming from a qualified barista who does not impress easily.

Drawing on “natural materials of the English countryside,” Beckham has introduced finishes that are not only beautiful, but practical too. The result is a version of the Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine that stands out for more than just its coffee capabilities.

Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine by David Beckham review

• Coffee type: bean-to-cup and filter
• Control type: automatic
• Water tank capacity: 2 litres
• Bean hopper capacity: 250g
• Dimensions: H: 37.7 x W: 33.7 x L: 35.5 cm
• Weight: 17.5kg

A little bit about the Ninja x David Beckham collaboration

David Beckham has teamed up with Ninja to launch a limited-edition luxury version of the ever popular Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine. It retains all the technical expertise that Ninja has built over more than a decade in the coffee space, but layers on bold design features and sleek finishes that feel distinctly Beckham in their direction and intent.

The six-month creative process focused on channelling Beckham’s signature aesthetic into something that would translate meaningfully into the kitchen. He explains that the design draws on “the natural materials of the English countryside,” which he then refined and adjusted to achieve his recognisable “sophisticated finish.” The result is a machine that combines a bead-blasted matte black stainless steel body with black chestnut wood grain and subtle gold accents, creating a piece that's simultaneously grounded and elevated.

The two key changes Beckham introduced stand out not just for how they look, but for how they improve everyday use. One of the most impactful updates is the move to a matte gunmetal finish. After reviewing multiple samples, he selected a surface that resists fingerprints and reduces the need for constant upkeep, making the machine far easier to maintain while preserving its polished appearance.

The woodgrain and gold accents may seem purely decorative at first glance, but they contribute more than just visual interest. They add a sense of weight, warmth, and tactility that enhances how the machine feels in use. Together, these details elevate the overall design, reinforcing that countryside-inspired aesthetic while ensuring the machine feels as considered to handle as it does to look at.

Who would the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine suit?

This is a coffee machine for someone who cares as much about how their kitchen looks as how their coffee tastes. It will appeal to style-led buyers who want their appliances to contribute to the overall aesthetic of their space rather than disrupt it. If you are drawn to premium finishes, eye-catching materials, and a more elevated way to make your coffee, this fits seamlessly into that vision.

It also suits someone who wants strong coffee performance without needing to develop full barista-level skills. The Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine offers guidance, structure, and consistency, making it ideal for those who want to improve their coffee at home but still appreciate a level of automation. It bridges the gap between enthusiast and everyday user, delivering results that feel professional without demanding too much technique.

Unboxing the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine

Ninja deserves a significant amount of credit for the packaging of this machine. The box is robust and structured, holding every component securely in place so nothing shifts or risks damage in transit. At the same time, the brand has clearly considered the environmental impact, using materials that are recyclable and easy to break down so you are not left dealing with excessive waste.

Inside, everything is clearly labelled and explained. There are guides, codes, and visual prompts that walk you through each element of the setup, ensuring that no feature is overlooked.

Ninja includes the portafilter with three baskets, a cleaning brush, and a water filter. While there are not countless extras, everything you need is accounted for, and the machine itself includes a storage compartment at the back so accessories have a dedicated place. It's one of many nice touches that Ninja's integrated into the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine.

What is the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine like to use?

Ninja has kept the internal technology of the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine identical in the David Beckham special-edition machine, which is absolutely a good thing. The Luxe Café Pro has been a hit with coffee geeks and novices alike.

The interface is built around a clear and comprehensive menu that covers hot and cold drinks, as well as short and long formats. On the far left, the integrated grinder suggests a setting based on your selection, but you can fine-tune this using a side dial, with changes reflected immediately on the digital display. This level of control is important because grind size directly affects extraction time and flavour balance.

The tamping system is another standout feature. It guides you into applying consistent pressure and positioning, which is one of the most common areas where home users struggle. By stabilising the portafilter and standardising the process, the machine removes a major source of inconsistency, so you'll get a even extraction and a more balanced cup.

Two central dials allow you to scroll through drink types, dividing options into black and milk-based coffees. As you move through the menu, each option lights up clearly, giving immediate visual feedback. There is also a strength adjustment, allowing you to control the ratio of coffee to water, which has a direct impact on body and intensity. It's all really nice and easy to navigate.

Does the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine make a good espresso?

The espresso is where the machine establishes its credibility, because the espresso is where all the flavour comes from. In the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine, extraction is consistent, with a steady flow that produces a rich crema and a well-balanced shot.

The flavour profile leans towards clarity, with enough body to feel satisfying but without tipping into heaviness. You can adjust grind size and strength to fine-tune the result, which gives you room to experiment but you'd struggle to really ruin a coffee's flavours with these tweaks, so beginners are in safe hands.

Does the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine make a good Americano?

An Americano relies heavily on water temperature and integration. If the water is too hot, it scorches the espresso and introduces bitterness. If it is too cool, the result becomes sharp and underdeveloped.

The Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machin handles this balance well, delivering water at a controlled temperature that preserves the integrity of the espresso. The water is dispensed through the brew head, flowing directly into the cup, which streamlines the process and reduces heat loss. I really enjoyed the simple flavours that came through in the Americano - it was beautifully drinkable.

Does the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine make a good cappuccino?

Milk texturing is often the deciding factor for home machines, and this performs strongly thanks to its dual boiler system. You can steam milk at the same time as brewing coffee, which significantly reduces wait times and makes the process feel much more fluid.

The milk jug includes internal measurement markers, which help with accuracy and reduce waste, particularly if you are still learning proportions. There is also a warming pedestal, which maintains temperature if you are not ready to pour immediately.

In testing, I used both dairy and plant-based milks, working through a range of textures from airy cappuccino foam to smoother, glossier latte milk. As an automated system, it delivers impressive consistency. While it does introduce slightly larger bubbles than hand-textured milk, resulting in a foam that is less silky than professional microfoam, it still produces a well-integrated and enjoyable texture that suits most users.

Does the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine make good iced coffee and cold brew?

The cold coffee functions are where this machine becomes particularly interesting. You can select a cold brew option that replicates a process which would traditionally take up to 24 hours. Here, it is completed in minutes using a low-heat extraction method. This approach produces a smoother, naturally sweeter flavour profile with reduced acidity, and the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine delivers on that promise.

If you just want a classic iced coffee, there are options which will extract a cooler, more concentrated coffee, which brews over ice to make the perfect cup. The result is clean, refreshing, and well suited to iced drinks. For someone like me, who lives and breathes cold brew, this is a rare, but unmissable feature.

Cleaning the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine

We have plenty of advice on how to clean a coffee machine, but the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine takes much of that effort on itself, running cleaning cycles and prompting you when intervention is needed. If the water tank needs refilling, it will alert you clearly, which helps prevent interruptions mid-use.

The finish also plays a role here. The matte stainless steel, enhanced by David Beckham’s design direction, resists fingerprints far better than expected and does not require constant wiping to maintain its appearance.

How does the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine compare?

The Ninja Café Luxe Collection is all built on the same intelligent foundation, but the difference between the Premier Series and the Pro Series (this one) comes down to how much guidance, scale, and refinement you want in your daily coffee routine. Both machines offer the same three-in-one functionality, moving seamlessly between espresso, cold brew, and filter coffee, and both benefit from Ninja’s Barista Assist Technology, which removes much of the guesswork by automatically adjusting grind size, dose, and brew settings. You also get the same integrated grinder with 25 settings and a built-in scale for precise dosing, which is a standout feature at this level and goes a long way in delivering consistent, café-quality results at home.

Where the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Series justifies its higher price is in the added ease and capacity. The integrated tamping system is cleaner and more controlled, which will appeal to anyone who wants a more streamlined workflow with less manual input. Its Dual Froth System Pro also expands on the Premier model, offering an XL milk jug and an additional frothing preset, giving you more flexibility when switching between dairy and plant-based milks or making multiple drinks back-to-back. The Premier Series is still incredibly capable and better suited to those who want excellent results with slightly less investment, but the Pro feels more polished and accommodating, particularly for households that make a lot of coffee or want the most guided, hands-off experience possible.

Should you buy the Ninja Luxe Café Pro Coffee Machine?

If you want a coffee machine that delivers strong, reliable performance while also elevating the look of your kitchen, this is an easy recommendation. It combines David Beckham's style and considered design with Ninja's reliably impressive functionality, offering enough control to satisfy coffee enthusiasts while remaining accessible to everyday users.

For anyone building a stylish kitchen space or looking to upgrade their coffee routine without stepping into fully manual territory, this strikes a compelling balance.

How we test coffee machines

At woman&home, we have a standardised series of tests that we put all of our coffee machines through. From espressos (which test all the fundamentals) through to cold brews, lattes (for milk texturing) and Americanos (for hot water). By the end of our review, you should know exactly what you're getting from each machine, but if you still have questions, don't hesitate to email me. You can also read more about our process on our dedicated page for how we test coffee machines.

It can’t just be me: everyone is talking about the Shark ChillPill. From Aryna Sabalenka’s “chill pill moment” courtside to Justin Bieber’s limited-edition collaboration, this cool (no pun intended) gadget is everywhere. But beyond the celebrity endorsements, I’ve noticed it in the wild too. From commuters cooling off on the tube, beachgoers misting themselves in the sun, and general summer survival mode on full display, it seems like the ChillPill covers every eventuality.

Inevitably, I took its ubiquity as a sign that it was time to properly test the Shark ChillPill for myself. And thank goodness I did - this heatwave is exceptionally intense and the ChillPill has worked hard to keep me cool. It's done such a good job that I've spotted the ChillPill sell out at Shark.

But do you really need to spend over £100 on a fan, when there are Amazon fans at under £20? With chilled contact plates designed for pulse points, a light misting function, and an ultra-quiet fan, the Shark ChillPill offers something extra. It's built to tackle heat in multiple ways rather than relying on airflow alone. In use, it's been my heatwave hero, but is it the one for you?

Shark ChillPill 3-in-1 Fan, Mist & InstaChill System review

• RRP: From £129.99
• Dimensions: 4.5 cm L x 8.41 cm W x 11.2 cm H
• Colours: Carbon (grey), Glacier (light blue), Haze (navy), Dragon Fruit (pink), Matcha (green), Iced Latte (beige)
• Weight: 350g
• Lowest temperature: 9°C
• Speed settings: 10
• Runtime: up to 11 hours
• Charge time: 3.5 hours with USB-C
• Wattage: 15
• Battery: Lithium Ion
• Warranty: 2 years

Our sample was kindly supplied by Currys, where you can buy the Shark ChillPill in all its colours.

What is the Shark ChillPill 3-in-1 Fan, Mist & InstaChill System?

The first question to answer is: what exactly is the Shark ChillPill? At its core, it’s a portable handheld cooling device designed around the idea of personal temperature control on the go. It fits in the palm of your hand, runs on a rechargeable battery, and features a fan with multiple speed settings — up to 10 levels of airflow depending on how intense you want the cooling effect to be.

Where it starts to move beyond a standard portable fan is in its attachments. Swap the head unit and it becomes a light misting device, delivering a fine, cool spray that’s designed for instant relief in extreme heat. There’s also a chilled metal plate attachment, which rapidly cools down and can be applied directly to pulse points such as the wrists, neck, or temples. It’s a more targeted approach to cooling, rather than relying on airflow alone.

The Shark ChillPill is versatile enough to meet whatever the situation demands: a gentle fan on a commute, a misting burst on a sweltering train platform, or the cooling plate during a hot flush or heat spike. It’s a small device, but one that’s designed to tackle heat from multiple angles at once.

Who would the Shark ChillPill 3-in-1 Fan, Mist & InstaChill System suit?

The Shark ChillPill is ideal for anyone who struggles in hot weather and wants targeted cooling without dragging a full-sized fan from room to room. It's small enough to pop on a bedside table, desk, or kitchen counter, but powerful enough to provide genuine relief during a heatwave. If you're prone to overheating at night, experiencing hot flushes, or simply find yourself fighting over the fan with a partner, the ChillPill offers an easy way to keep cool exactly where you need it.

It's also a great option for people who spend a lot of time on the move. The cordless design makes it surprisingly versatile: I've used it while working at my desk, carried it into the garden during sunny afternoons, and even taken it from room to room as temperatures climbed throughout the day. While it won't replace a large pedestal fan for cooling an entire room, it's brilliant for personal cooling, delivering a concentrated stream of air that makes a real difference when you're sitting, sleeping, or trying to stay comfortable on the hottest days of the year.

It's also worth emphasising that this is more than a fan: it mists and has cold plates that you can press on hot spots, especially pressure points. I've actually found these two features, not the fan, to be my favourite. The cold plate makes you jump it's so icy and the misting is more refreshing than a drying fan. It tackled sweats and heatwaves on a whole new level.

What is the Shark ChillPill 3-in-1 Fan, Mist & InstaChill System like to use?

I’ve had the absolute joy of testing the Shark ChillPill, and it has, without question, been the most impressive portable cooling device I’ve used. The compact unit sits comfortably in the hand, even with smaller hands like mine, and feels well-balanced in use, with a reassuring weight that ensures the ChillPill feels premium

The design is split into two clear zones: one end accepts the interchangeable cooling attachments, while the other houses a simple rotary dial that controls both fan speed and cooling intensity depending on the mode selected. It’s really intuitive, which means you don't need to worry about menus or apps, just a tactile twist control that immediately adjusts output. On fan mode, increasing the dial ramps airflow from a light, background breeze to a noticeably powerful jet of air. Importantly, even at higher settings, it remains significantly quieter than most handheld fans I’ve tested, to the point where I’ve comfortably used it on trains and in quieter public spaces without feeling self-conscious.

Battery performance is where the ChillPill really deserves a special mention, especially in comparison to other premium portable fans. I ran it continuously on a full 11-hour train journey, alternating between fan and misting modes, and it still had charge left at the end of the trip. That level of endurance makes it less of a handheld accessory and more like a all-day cooling too and a handbag essential. If I needed it hands free, the two elements can twist into completely customisable positions that let it sit at any angle. I also regularly take it to tennis sessions, where it’s become something of a running joke. My coach has since bought one after repeatedly borrowing mine and seeing Sablenka using hers

The misting function is the most attention-grabbing mode in public and it's also the one that I've had the most questions about. It mists a fine, controlled spray rather than heavy droplets, and output can be adjusted so it feels like a cooling veil rather than anything wet or messy. It does require a small water reservoir to be filled, but in practice I found one fill lasted far longer than expected, with refills needed more for hygiene than capacity. It performs best in dry heat, where it provides immediate evaporative relief without leaving the skin damp. I’ve used it extensively abroad and even during airport delays, where it made long waits more tolerable.

The chilled plate attachment is the most technically interesting element, even if it gets less attention. Inspired by Shark’s beauty-tech cooling systems, it rapidly drops in temperature on activation and maintains a consistent chill that can feel almost startling on first contact. Applied to pulse points, wrists, neck, or temples, it delivers a measurable sense of relief rather than just a sensation of cool air. It can also be used more cosmetically under the eyes or on flushed skin, where the cooling response is immediate thanks to the metal’s rapid thermal transfer. In testing, it became the feature I reached for most when overheated, particularly during outdoor sport.

How does the Shark ChillPill 3-in-1 Fan, Mist & InstaChill System compare?

The most obvious comparison is between the Dyson HushJet Cool Mini Fan. Compared to the Dyson, the Shark ChillPill feels like a more advanced, feature-rich device. The Dyson is a slim, elegantly simple portable fan that sits at a slightly lower price point, and it does that core job well, delivering consistent, portable airflow in a clean, premium package.

However, in day-to-day use, I’d personally stretch the extra £30 for the Shark (although it's really only £10 with the Amazon Prime Day deal). It feels more fully realised as a cooling system: the airflow is more customisable, the operation is quieter in practice, and the overall experience is more versatile thanks to its multiple modes and attachments. While the Dyson excels as a straightforward, no-fuss option, the Shark offers noticeably more functionality and a more premium-feeling performance across different real-world scenarios.

Which Shark ChillPill 3-in-1 Fan accessories should I get?

Some of the coolest (no pun intended) accessories come separately to the Shark ChillPill. I don't own any, but I'm prepping myself to make an investment, since it would be really handy to have a wrist strap or travel case. There are more Shark ChillPill accessories on their site, but these are the ones on my wish list:

Should you buy the Shark ChillPill 3-in-1 Fan, Mist & InstaChill System?

After testing the Shark ChillPill against other premium portable fans, across heatwaves, commutes, travel, and time at home, it’s clear that the ChillPill is something really special. I love the three-pronged attack to any heat, especially because it's not gimmicky. Add in its stronger customisation, quieter operation, and impressive battery life, and this works hard to earn its place as a handbag essential. I know, it's not cheap, but if you can find a saving, or spare the cash, the Shark ChillPill is the fan you'll reach for all summer long.

Our sample was kindly supplied by Currys, where you can buy the Shark ChillPill in all its colours.

When I heard that Simba had launched a new range of bedding, featuring six different fabric collections, I was immediately intrigued.

Having fallen hook, line, and sinker for a Simba mattress that I reviewed for our best cooling mattresses buying guide, I was curious to see whether the same level of comfort and attention to detail that had wowed me would carry over to something as, well, boring as bed sheets.

I'm obsessed with the Simba Hybrid Luxe mattress and love the idea of making my bed feel like a five-star suite, but bed sheets are one thing I’ve never got excited about, nor been inclined to spend a fortune on. With three children and a guest room, there's usually five sets of bedding in rotation in my house at any one time, so practicality has always taken priority over luxury. I’ve owned plenty of bog-standard bedding over the years, and none of it has ever made me rethink my entire bed linen collection - until now.

Simba Cool Linen review

Initially tempted by Soft Muslin, I settled for the heat-regulating Cool Linen set for this review. A blend of linen and Tencel, it promised breathability, softness and a more regulated sleeping temperature.

How we tested the Simba Cool Linen bedding

I took delivery of a Cool Linen Bedding Set - supplied by Simba for testing purposes - and committed to sleeping on it with my husband for this review. I noted all the key features of this bedding, such as its moisture-wicking and heat-regulation properties, and set out to discover whether it delivered on Simba’s promises.

Simba Hybrid Luxe Mattress review: Specifications

Simba Cool Linen Bedding: First impressions

I’m fussy when it comes to temperature at night. I’m perimenopausal, so prone to night sweats. At the same time, I have an underactive thyroid, which means I feel chilly most of the time – and I hate being cold in bed.

That puts me in an awkward position when it comes to bedding. I want warmth and cosy comfort, but I also need breathability. Most bedding – just call me Goldilocks – is either too warm, too cool, or just not quite right.

I currently sleep on brushed cotton bedding from Dunelm with a washable wool duvet from The Woolroom, both of which I’m very fond of. But as summer and heatwave season arrived, I started to find my usual setup too warm.

The challenge is finding bedding that strikes that balance between comfort and temperature control. And because I’m so attached to what I already have, I wasn’t in any rush to change it.

But the moment I unwrapped Simba’s Cool Linen bedding, I understood what I had been missing.

I hadn’t planned to put the bedding on the bed straight away, but I ended up doing so because it was so inviting straight out of the packaging.

The first surprise was how soft the fabric felt. I’d expected something closer to traditional linen – slightly crisp, maybe even a little stuif – but this was remarkably soft and comforting to the touch.

It also has a lovely, lightweight quality, too. Changing a king-size duvet cover is never a task I look forward to – but this seemed extra easy to pop on. The fabric is light to handle, and there was plenty of room inside the duvet cover and pillowcases, so nothing felt tight, awkward or overstuffed. Yet neither did the duvet swim around inside the cover.

One tiny complaint – I find buttons on duvet covers a bit fiddly, and I think I would have loved this even more if it had avoided them altogether.

Simba Cool Linen Bedding: Comfort and performance

That first night, I couldn’t wait to climb into bed - this bedding is seriously inviting.

I kept my brushed cotton fitted sheet in place, as I was testing the Bedding Set (£229, King size), which includes the duvet cover and a pair of pillow cases – although a full Bedding Bundle is also available, and that includes the fitted sheet.

The duvet cover felt cool without being cold against my skin, and the fabric was exceptionally soft but not clingy. There was no period of adjusting that you often get with new bedding – it was just like slipping into hotel bedding that's so good, it makes you want to check the label to see where it’s from.

Most importantly, the Cool Linen bedding seemed to help regulate temperature in a way that suited the quirks of my inner thermostat. I didn’t wake up feeling too warm, but I also didn’t feel chilly in the way I usually do with lightweight bedding. I honestly didn’t think bedding existed in this sweet spot, but here it is.

Simba Cool Linen Bedding: Who would it suit?

It’s the blend of linen and Tencel that seems to be the key to how well Simba’s Cool Linen bedding performs.

Linen is naturally breathable and cooling, but it can sometimes feel a little rough, particularly when used for bedding. Tencel, by contrast, is exceptionally soft and excellent at wicking moisture away from the body.

If, like me, you’re a bit of a mixture of temperatures – or you’re dealing with hormonal changes or health conditions that can affect your body temperature at night – I think you’ll find this fabric combination nothing short of magical. Soft yet cool, and cosy yet breathable, it sounds almost contradictory, but that’s exactly what Simba has managed to achieve.

It also makes an excellent choice for in-between seasons, when heavier bedding feels too warm but summer sets still feel a little too light.

Simba Cool Linen Bedding: Who might want something else?

Something unexpected that I’ve come to appreciate bout this bedding is its relaxed appearance. It has a sort of 'artfully crumpled' look that feels unfussy, and it doesn’t need ironing, which I also love, because life's too short for that.

Somehow this bedding makes the whole room feel calmer and more inviting – but if your bedroom vibe is more starched sheets and the curated perfection of an interiors magazine, you might prefer the crispness of Simba's new Cotton Percale or the silkiness of its new Egyptian Cotton bedding range.

Simba Cool Linen bedding review: should you buy it?

I’ve always thought of Simba as a brand that has perfected mattress design. What I didn’t expect was for that same expertise to translate so well into bedding.

It’s not the cheapest bedding you can buy, but it does feel like one of those purchases where the difference in quality is unmistakable from the second it's out of the packaging. A premium price tag doesn't always mean a better product, of course, but in this case, you're getting what you pay for. It's hands-down the best bedding I've ever experienced.

Having tested it for several months now, I can honestly say I don’t see myself going back to other bedding brands. I’ve finally discovered bedding that genuinely solves my ongoing 'too hot, too cold' dilemma in a way that feels reliable but luxurious – and that's something I'm entirely prepared to pay more for.

If you spent the recent heatwave tossing, turning, and kicking off the duvet only to wake up tangled in it again three hours later, you're not alone. While everyone else was desperately opening windows, pointing fans at their beds, and Googling whether sleeping with frozen water bottles was actually safe, we were testing something altogether more futuristic: the Eight Sleep Pod 5. This smart mattress cover promises to actively cool (or warm) your bed throughout the night, creating what is essentially a climate-controlled sleeping environment.

As someone who regularly tests the best mattress toppers, I've seen plenty of products claim they can transform your sleep. Cooling pillows, temperature-regulating duvets, breathable mattresses they all help to some extent. The Eight Sleep Pod 5 takes a completely different approach. Rather than relying on specialist materials alone, it uses water-powered temperature control and sleep-tracking technology to adjust your bed's climate while you sleep.

For women navigating hot flushes, night sweats, or simply wondering how to sleep in the heat, that sounds almost too good to be true. So when our tester, Sally, spent several weeks sleeping on the Eight Sleep Pod 5, I was keen to find out whether this high-tech sleep system could genuinely deliver cooler, more comfortable nights. And whether it's worth its eye-watering price tag.

Eight Sleep Pod 5 Cooling Mattress Topper review

• RRP: £2,699
• Sizes: UK double, UK king, UK super king, UK emperor
• Materials: polyester, rayon, nylon, bamboo
• Temperature range: Cools to 12ºC or heats to 43ºC
• Zones: dual controls
• Alarm: vibration and/or thermal
• Machine washable: no
• Trial: 30 nights
• Warranty: 5 years

What is the Eight Sleep Pod 5 Cooling Mattress Topper?

The Eight Sleep Pod 5 isn't really your standard mattress topper, nor is it a cooling mattress in its own right. Instead, it's a smart cover that sits around your existing mattress, turning it into a temperature-controlled sleep system. Hidden inside the cover is a network of tiny tubes through which water is circulated, allowing the Pod to heat or cool your side of the bed to a precise temperature. A separate hub, which sits discreetly beside the bed, does the hard work behind the scenes, pumping water through the system and making automatic adjustments throughout the night.

What sets the Pod 5 apart from traditional cooling bedding is that it actively responds to your body rather than simply trying to dissipate heat. Using built-in sensors, it tracks factors such as your sleep stages, heart rate, breathing rate, and body temperature, then tweaks the climate of your bed accordingly. If you tend to wake up drenched in sweat at 3am or find yourself piling on extra blankets before dawn, the system is designed to react before you even notice you're uncomfortable. Everything is controlled through the Eight Sleep app, where you can set your preferred temperature and view detailed sleep insights each morning.

Who would the Eight Sleep Pod 5 Cooling Mattress Topper suit?

The Eight Sleep Pod 5 will appeal most to anyone whose sleep is regularly disrupted by temperature. That includes hot sleepers, couples who can never agree on whether the room is too warm or too cold, and women navigating perimenopause or menopause. One of the standout features is its dedicated Hot Flash Mode, which uses the Pod's sensors to detect sudden changes in skin temperature and automatically cool the bed in response. Rather than waking up overheated and throwing off the covers, the idea is that the Pod reacts before a hot flush has the chance to fully disturb your sleep.

It's also worth noting that Eight Sleep includes a Pregnancy Mode, designed for those experiencing the temperature fluctuations that often come with pregnancy. Combined with the ability for each partner to choose their own sleep temperature, it makes the Pod 5 is particularly well suited to life stages where sleep can become elusive.

Of course, you don't need a specific reason to appreciate it. If you've ever spent a summer night flipping your pillow over in search of the cool side or lying awake wondering whether you could buy another fan to keep you cool, you're exactly the kind of person Eight Sleep has in mind.

What is the Eight Sleep Pod 5 Cooling Mattress Topper like to use?

The Eight Sleep Pod 5 delivers a sleeping experience that's unlike anything we've tested before. During our trial period, much of the UK was sweltering through heatwaves. And yet, our tester, Sally, found she could sleep in her usual pyjamas "I almost forgot how hot it was outside," she told me. "Normally I'd be opening windows and throwing the duvet off, but with the Pod, I just slept like normal."

Sally tested the blanket with the Pod 5 and loved having the cooling effect comes not only from the mattress cover itself but also from Eight Sleep's temperature-regulating duvet, which works with the system to create a noticeably cooler sleep environment.

Whilst Sally was feeling pretty smug about sleeping through the heatwave, she noted that there was work needed before she reached her perfect slumber state. She noted that first few nights felt surprisingly strange, particularly if you've spent your whole life climbing into a warm or even room-temperature bed.

"Getting into a cold bed felt completely wrong at first," Sally admitted. "My instinct was that beds are supposed to be cosy and warm and the cold actually made me feel like the bed was wet, or just a little off. But after a few nights, my body became used to the feeling and it knew to expect a cooler experience."

Heatwaves aside, Sally was grateful for the cooling feature when she came down with a fever during testing. "I spent a day in bed feeling awful and turned the Pod right down to 17 degrees. It made such a difference. Usually when I have a temperature I feel trapped by the heat and just lie in bed with a frozen flannel on my face, but this helped me feel more comfortable and I could snatch some naps and sleep without waking up as a sweaty mess."

The duvet also took some getting used to for Sally. Because it's designed to work with the Pod system, it sits differently from a traditional duvet and feels more anchored to the bed. "It's almost like having the duvet permanently tucked in at the end," Sally explained. "You can't really wrap yourself up in it. I noticed it immediately because I'm someone who wraps the duvet around my shoulders. and between my legs" However, she found that once she'd adjusted to the setup, the benefits outweighed the change. "I slept much more deeply than I normally do, and I wasn't waking up because I was too hot."

One of Sally's favourite features was the app, which we'll talk more about later. As an overview, the app is where you fine-tune the bed temperature of your bed, and it's also where the Pod will let you know when it's made automatic overnight adjustments using its Autopilot mode.

"I liked knowing about the autopilot mode, working away in the background," Sally said. "I wasn't constantly fiddling with settings because the Pod 5 seemed to know when I needed cooling down. I think that's why I was waking up fewer times. The smaller hot flushes that I would have had were being minimised and the bigger ones, which still woke me up, felt more soothed and easy to control."

The smart alarm also won her over. Rather than jolting her awake with a loud noise, the Pod can vibrate the mattress or warm the bed to wake you gradually. "It feels much less aggressive than a phone alarm," Sally said. "Then you just press the button on the side of the bed to stop it."

For anyone worried about comfort, Sally reported that the technology quickly fades into the background. "You can't feel any of the tubes or water channels when you're lying down," she said. "If I hadn't known they were there, I wouldn't have guessed." The accompanying hub unit does make a faint sound while it works, but it proved unobtrusive during testing. "It's more of a soft background hum than a noise," she explained. "After the first night, I stopped noticing it altogether."

Does the Eight SLeep Pod 5 help with night sweats?

For women dealing with perimenopause, menopause, or simply running hot at night, the Eight Sleep Pod 5's biggest selling point is its ability to respond to temperature changes before they fully wake you up. Unlike cooling bedding, which can only passively disperse heat, the Pod actively cools the mattress surface throughout the night. Sally tested the Pod during some exceptionally warm weather and found the difference was noticeable almost immediately.

"I usually wake up feeling overheated at least once or twice a night," she told me. "With the Pod, I wasn't waking up as sweaty and uncomfortable. I'd occasionally become aware that I was getting warm, but before I fully woke up, the bed would feel cooler again. And on the times that I did wake up, it wasn't with the maddening levels of heat that I've become used to." If, like Sally, you experience hot flushes, there's also a dedicated Hot Flash Mode designed to recognise sudden temperature spikes and respond with additional cooling.

What impressed Sally most was that the cooling felt natural rather than artificial. "It's not like sleeping under an air conditioning unit or having a fan blasting at your face," she explained. "The whole bed just feels consistently cold and comfortable." While it won't cure the underlying cause of night sweats, it does address one of the biggest frustrations: waking up because you're too hot.

What health data does the Eight Sleep Pod 5 track?

The Eight Sleep Pod 5 is as much a sleep tracker as it is a cooling system. Every morning, the app provides a detailed breakdown of your night's sleep, including how long you spent asleep, how often you woke up, your sleep stages, heart rate, heart rate variability, and breathing rate. For data lovers, it's a fascinating window into what happens after your head hits the pillow.

Sally found herself checking the app every morning. "I became slightly obsessed with it," she laughed. "It was interesting to see how different habits affected my sleep score. If I'd had a late dinner or a glass of wine, I could often see the impact the next day." The app presents the information in a clear, user-friendly format, giving you a nightly sleep score alongside personalised recommendations designed to improve recovery and sleep quality.

Perhaps most useful is the way the data works alongside the Pod's temperature controls. Rather than simply telling you how you slept, the system uses those insights to inform future adjustments through Autopilot. "It feels like the bed is learning what works for you," Sally said. "The longer I used it, the less I thought about settings and the more it seemed to take care of itself." For anyone interested in understanding their sleep patterns, the Pod 5 offers far more insight than a standard fitness tracker, while simultaneously working to improve the conditions that help you sleep better in the first place.

How does the Eight Sleep Pod 5 Cooling Mattress Topper compare?

There's no escaping that the Eight Sleep Pod 5 is expensive. However, the experience is impressive and it is, undeniably, effective, but what else is out there? And are there alternatives to the Eight Sleep that are good too?

Should you buy the Eight Sleep Pod 5 Cooling Mattress Topper?

If you really, deeply care about your sleep, it's hard to beat the Eight Sleep Pod 5. It's a premium piece of kit that helps manage heatwaves, hormones, and bodily fluctuations using smart technology that actually works. It sold Sally, our tester, who enjoyed deeper, more comfortable sleep. However, it's worth factoring in the subscription cost and an adjustment period for this very different style of sleeping.

How we test mattress toppers

At woman&home, we have a series of standardised tests that we put all of our mattress toppers through. However, the Eight Sleep is a little different. Our focus for testing this wasn't just about comfort levels, we wanted to dig deep into the cooling power, the sleep tracking, smart features, and hormone help claims. We worked through all of these for months before writing up this review, so you're getting as much detail and real-life evidence as possible. However, we know this is a big purchase, so will happily answer any questions you have over email.

You can also read more about how we test mattress toppers on our dedicated page.

I’m a self-confessed Disney addict. Sometimes I check the wait times on my Disneyland Paris app just to see what the queues are like…despite the fact I live 700 miles away in Worcestershire. And as any Disney resort addict knows, staying ‘club level’ – the Castle Club at the Disneyland Hotel in Paris – is the ultimate goal. These rooms and suites, at each of the Disney parks worldwide, offer the top tier of Disney accommodation with lots of added extras…and a price tag to match.

As my husband and I are both celebrating our 40th birthdays this year, we decided to book ahead and splurge on a three-night stay in a garden-view room at Castle Club, coupled with Premier Access Ultimate tickets to help us skip the queues.. By booking 12 months in advance when tickets were released and staying outside of European school holidays, we managed to make the stay affordable.

Here’s what was included, what wasn’t, and whether we’d do it again. (Spoiler alert, if you can afford it, then 100% book it.)

What is Castle Club?

Often called a ‘hotel within a hotel’, Castle Club comprises 41 rooms and 18 suites at the Disneyland Hotel in Paris. These rooms sit on two private floors of the hotel and can only be accessed by guests with Castle Club Magic Passes – the tickets that allow you to access both the parks and your hotel.

Even without the Castle Club upgrade, the Disneyland Hotel is magical, with its iconic pale pink facade and soaring lobby with glittering chandelier. From the Clarins spa, to the complimentary kids’ club and daily bookable princess meet-and-greets, there are lots of perks to staying in even the most basic of rooms here, which are dubbed Superior Rooms.

A step above that are Deluxe Rooms, which include access to a lounge with included drinks and snacks. We’ve previously stayed in these rooms types and they’re all beautifully appointed, with nightly turndown service and added extras like impromptu performances from Storytellers in that magnificent lobby, with its sweeping central staircase.

Whichever room type you choose, the Disneyland Hotel is the only hotel that sits within the Disneyland Paris resort, so you’re already through security each morning and get easier access to the parks. We’ve stayed off-site before, and the convenience of being right at the park gates and through security is well worth the spend for us.

Staying Castle Club is the ultimate level of accommodation here, but it is costly. Our stay cost almost £5,000 for three nights for four people, which included accommodation for two adults, and two children aged four and eight, plus four days of theme park tickets, and all of the Castle Club perks.

What is included in Castle Club?

From the moment we pulled up outside the hotel, we were treated like royalty. Staying Castle Club means you get concierge parking and luggage services.

Our Tesla had made it from Calais to Disneyland with about three miles of charge left, so the concierge offered to get it fully charged for us during our stay, which was included in the price we’d paid. Hilariously, he’s somehow set our Tesla to quack like Donald Duck every time it locks now – a cute touch and one I don’t know how to turn off, so we’ll be quacking away for the foreseeable future!

With the costs involved, we wanted to maximise each moment of our stay, so we actually stayed in a nearby budget hotel the night before our arrival so that we could get to Disneyland in time to take advantage of Early Magic Hours on our first day. Early Magic Hours is the hour before parks officially open when only Disney hotel guests can access the parks.

The concierge personally escorted us up to the Castle Club check in, which is an adventure in itself. There’s a private lift for Castle Club guests and when you first arrive, you pick up a secret, old-fashioned wired telephone to let them know you’ve arrived and they send the lift down to collect you. There’s a concierge and reception exclusively for Castle Club guests, which is manned 24/7 by staff who genuinely can’t do enough to help.

When my eight-year-old got upset because she unexpectedly lost a tooth and didn’t think the tooth fairy would know where she was, one of the team, Marvin, wrote her a beautiful note from Tinkerbell and ‘pixie dusted’ her a Minnie Mouse teddy and ears. For those who aren’t up on their Disney lingo, ‘pixie dust’ is something magical that happens while staying at Disney that you haven’t expected or asked for. When it does happen, it’s truly magical and seeing her face in the morning will stay with me forever.

Rooms are typically available from 3pm but we were able to access the Castle Club Lounge from 11am, which is just the perfect place to relax and unwind away from the fun of the parks. The lounge is so elegant, with opulent furnishings, plush fabrics and the most amazing views of Sleeping Beauty’s Castle.

The lounge is open throughout the day and evening, and we never had an issue getting a table.

In the morning, breakfast is served from 7.30am to 11am, with at least three Disney princesses guaranteed to visit between 9.30am and 11am. We chose to grab a takeaway coffee first thing, then use Early Magic Hours to get on a few rides without queuing, before coming back for a leisurely brunch and meeting the princesses. The girls loved getting their autograph books signed and having photographs with their favourite characters.

The breakfast buffet had everything you could want, from cloud-like pastries to hand-cooked omelettes, full English items, Mickey waffles, cereals, cold meats, cheeses, fresh breads and moreish honeycomb.

You can enjoy complimentary hot drinks and soft drinks throughout the day, including the most decadent hot chocolates, as well as freshly brewed coffees and fresh fruit juices. You can also ask for bottles of water and soft drinks to take away – just make sure you decant them into plastic bottles, as glass isn’t allowed in the parks.

In the afternoon, you get afternoon tea served in the lounge from 3.30pm to 5.30pm. We managed to use this and breakfast as two of our meals each day, and just ate at one of the quick service restaurants for our other meal. There were more pastries, pancakes and lots of desserts on offer during afternoon tea, as well as a few hot options, like pizza rolls. Personally I would have liked some bread and butter or a soup included as part of the afternoon tea as it didn’t quite live up to the levels of breakfast.

One of the biggest perks of the Castle Club lounge is being able to sit back with a complimentary drink and watch the fireworks display each evening. The girls could pop their PJs and slippers on and be in bed two minutes after the display had finished. Staff dim the lights and the music from outside is piped into the lounge, so you can experience the spectacle and the atmosphere, without the queues, crowds and schlep back to bed.

What about the VIP lift?

This VIP Castle Club lift is the thing you might have seen on social media if you're a fellow Disney parks fanatic. Naturally I had to film how long it took us to get from our room to the Disneyland Park gate and it was less than two minutes. From bed to Disney Main Street in less than 120 seconds is pretty much a dream come true for me.

There are two lifts serving Castle Club rooms and suites, and we never had to wait long for one to arrive. You simply swipe your Magic Pass and select 'park entrance' and it sweeps you downstairs to a dedicated Castle Club entrance gate, where we never had to queue.

If you're new to Disneyland Paris, it's worth noting that this perk is great for Disneyland Park – the OG park with Sleeping Beauty's castle and iconic rides like Dumbo and Big Thunder Mountain – but it doesn't provide quicker access to Disney Adventure World, the second park which is about five minutes' walk away and houses attractions linked to franchises like Toy Story, Frozen and Marvel.

What are the Castle Club rooms like?

All of the bedrooms at the Disneyland Hotel are exquisite, with a fairytale feel and hidden motifs, such as Cinderella’s slipper and Belle’s rose, on the pattern of the carpets and on moulding around the mirror in the bathroom. Each room is subtly themed around a specific princess, from Elsa to Raya, Moana to Aurora, and you can request your favourite seven days before you check in (although there’s never a guarantee you’ll get it).

You’ll get plush bathrobes and slippers and luxe Clarins toiletries. In the bedroom, there’s a fridge with complimentary water juice and nuts, a coffee machine, kettle and giant TV hidden inside your mirror with Disney streaming as standard.

There isn’t a huge amount of difference between the Deluxe rooms and standard Castle Club rooms in terms of decor. Both have the addition of beautiful illuminated canopies above the beds that sparkle gently and can provide pre-bedtime light shows.

You do get a top-of-the-range Dyson hairdryer, upgraded toiletries and luxurious Castle Club-branded robes and slippers though, which get a few envious looks by the pool! And you also every bathroom amenity you could dream of – no need to worry if you forget your toothbrush or comb here!

A nightly turndown service comes as standard in Castle Club, which you need to request in other room types. You’ll find an exclusive storybook on your pillow, plus calming teabags and nougat waiting for you to enjoy. You’ll also get your minibar replenished every day, which you don’t in Superior and Deluxe rooms

There are two types of Castle Club room – Park View, which overlook the castle and cost a premium, and Garden View, which face either the sides of the hotel or Fantasia Gardens. We were lucky to get a Cinderella themed room with two balconies overlooking the fountains. Waking early and sipping a coffee on the balcony while the park was deserted was a real treat.

Another tier above this are the suites, which are incredibly lavish and themed around iconic fairytales like Cinderella and Frozen. If you book a suite you'll get welcome gifts on arrival and larger balconies or premium views.

How can you make the experience more VIP?

We booked Premier Access Ultimate passes, which take away the stress of queuing for the most popular rides. You can use the passes once per day for the biggest attractions, from the new Frozen Ever After, which often had wait times of two hours, to icons like It’s A Small World and Peter Pan’s Flight.

You load the passes onto your phone’s wallet and scan a QR code at the dedicated Premier Access entrances to join the end of each queue. The longest we waited when using the passes was 15 minutes, so it makes a huge difference to how many rides you can get done in a day.

It was out of our budget this time, but if you really want to go big, you can even book a VIP tour for a day where a dedicated guide will provide unlimited speedy access to shows, attractions, character meets and show you straight to reserved VIP seats for parades and displays.

How to get to Disneyland Paris

You can fly, take the ferry, go Eurostar or take Le Shuttle. We prefer to have our car with us. Firstly, you can pack as many princess dresses as you like, and secondly, you can bring home as many princess dresses/and other merchandise as you like. Plus, we like to stock up on French wine while we’re there.

I’ve never used Le Shuttle - previously known as Eurotunnel – but we found the whole thing simple and stress free. We have an electric car so arrived three hours before our departure and plugged into the super-fast chargers, which took less than an hour to give us a full tank of charge while we popped to the loo and had a look around the shops. We were given the option to move our departure time forward free of charge as we’d arrived early, and we actually boarded and left two hours earlier than planned. This turned out to be a godsend as the traffic on the outskirts of Paris can be a pain.

I highly recommend getting a Revolut card, or similar, which allows you to quickly exchange GBP for euros and pay for the roadside tolls, of which there are a few on the route to Disneyland. You’ll also need to register for a CritAir sticker with the French government. Ideally do this a month or so in advance as you’ll be sent a paper sticker to display in your windscreen, but don’t worry if you forget – print off your booking confirmation and that counts. The drive itself is on wide motorways with plenty of service stations and electric car charging points to stop off at.

Finding one of the best barbecues when you're short on outdoor space isn't always easy. Compact models can feel compromised, while larger gas and charcoal options often dominate the garden before you've even cooked your first burger. The Char-Broil Patio Bistro Cube E aims to strike a happy middle ground: petite enough for patios, balconies and smaller gardens, yet powerful enough to feed a family and impress your guests.

We've been testing barbecues of all shapes and sizes in search of the models that genuinely make outdoor cooking easier, and the Patio Bistro Cube E quickly stood out as a serious contender for smaller spaces. With its electric design, speedy heat-up time and fuss-free controls, it promises all the joy of eating outside without the usual hassle of charcoal, gas bottles and lengthy setup.

But can something so compact really deliver when dinner is on the line? We put the Char-Broil Patio Bistro Cube E through its paces in true British conditions, from heatwaves to hailstorms, cooking everything from sausages and chicken kebabs to charred vegetables to see whether this mini but mighty barbecue lives up to the hype.

Char Broil Patio Bistro Cube E review

• RRP: £229.95
• Type: Electric
• Dimensions: 53.6D x 47.1W x 47.4H cm
• Temperature range: up to 320 °C
• Power cord length: 3m
• Wattage: 1500 watts
• Automatic shut off time: 11 hours

How we tested the Char Broil Patio Bistro Cube E

The Char Broil Patio Bistro Cube E Barbecue was reviewed by Annalise, who is part of our tester network. Here's a little more about why she's the perfect person for the job...

Unboxing the Char Broil Patio Bistro Cube E barbecue

Barbecues often come with more than just the box, so we always like to talk about what it's like getting your barbecue set up and ready. Annalise was impressed with how this looked when it arrived. “It came really well packed and was actually bigger than I thought it would be,” she notes.

Annalise found the Char Broil Patio Bistro Cube E Barbecue easy to set up. It comes almost fully assembled and doesn't require you to have any extra or specialist kit. Once it was all assembled, Annalise played with lifting and lowering the barbecue lid. She noted that she “was impressed straight away with the quality – it just feels sturdy and well made.” First impressions definitely count and, for Annalise, the Char Broil Patio Bistro Cube E barbecue makes a great start.

What's the Char Broil Patio Bistro Cube E barbecue like to use?

One of the best things about the Char-Broil Patio Bistro Cube E Barbecue is that it's low-maintenance and quick to get set up. There’s no fiddling with charcoal, no waiting around for gas canisters to heat up and no complicated setup process. As our tester, Annalise, puts it: “you just switch it on and get cooking.”

She noted that set-up takes just minutes, and once plugged in, the barbecue gets to work quickly. You’ll be ready to cook in around 15–20 minutes, with the grill reaching a maximum temperature of 320°C, which is higher than many electric barbecues on the market. Having the extra heat really matters when it comes to performance, giving you a proper sear on everything from sausages to marinated chicken, without the long wait times associated with traditional setups.

During testing, Annalise cooked a range of barbecue staples, from vegetables and skewers to chicken and sausages, and found the experience consistently reliable. Annalise found that the temperature control is straightforward rather than technical, which makes it particularly appealing if you want something that suits beginners or all members of the family, rather than needing the dedicated grill chef around when you want to have a barbecue.

Perhaps the most important, part of her review is the results: how did the food turn out? And is this a barbecue that you can host with? At a fundamental level, Annalise was pleased. She noted that “the food cooked evenly across the whole grill,” which is often where electric barbecues can fall short. This meant that she didn't need to constantly move food around or second-guess hot spots. Everything cooked steadily, which was perfect for relaxed entertaining and even simple meals with the family. Annalise found she was more free to roam and chat with other people in the garden rather than being glued to the grill.

Speed is another area where it the Cube E outperforms many traditional barbecues. It heats quickly, cooks quickly, and is ready when you are, which is a major advantage in the unpredictable British summer, where planning an hours-long charcoal cookout isn’t always realistic. Provided you’ve got access to a plug socket (or a suitable outdoor power source), it also offers flexibility to move it around the garden if the weather turns.

Sausages were the real standout for Annalise. They developed that irresistible combination of crisp, caramelised skins and juicy centres that you hope for from a barbecue, without any of the burnt patches or frantic shuffling that can happen on less even grills. The consistent heat meant they browned beautifully all over, and she found myself reaching for the Cube E whenever sausages were on the menu. Vegetables were equally impressive. Peppers softened and charred around the edges, courgettes picked up attractive brown marks without turning to mush, and corn took on a gentle sweetness too. Even the tricky marinated chicken kebabs were a success, cooking through evenly while staying tender and succulent rather than drying out.

Because there's one main grill surface, it's worth being a little strategic with what you're cooking. Annalise found it easiest to batch together foods with similar cooking times, a round of sausages and vegetables, for example, or a full load of chicken skewers, rather than trying to juggle lots of different elements at once.

That said, the generous lid makes this surprisingly manageable. It's light and easy to lift with one hand, traps heat brilliantly when closed, and, perhaps most importantly, you can comfortably hold it open to check on your food without feeling like you're about to singe the hair off your arms. It's a small detail, but one that makes the whole experience feel much more relaxed and enjoyable.

When it came to cleaning up afterwards, the Char Broil Patio Bistro Cube E continued to impress. Annalise found it “really easy to clean afterwards,” a detail that shouldn’t be underestimated when compared with the scrubbing and ash-clearance required for charcoal models.

Once it's sparkling clean and ready to rest, Annalise was keen to add that another standout feature is how portable and easy to store the Char Broil Patio Bistro Cube E is. The Cube E is light enough to move and easy to tuck away, making it particularly well suited to smaller gardens or patios. As Annalise explains, “I love being able to store it in the garage when I’m done and not have a big, ugly BBQ taking up space in the garden.”"

Who would the Char Broil Patio Bistro Cube E suit?

The Char-Broil Patio Bistro Cube E Barbecue will particularly appeal to people who love the idea of eating outdoors, but could happily do without the mess, planning and maintenance that often comes with traditional barbecuing.

It's a brilliant option for busy families, first-time barbecue owners, and anyone who wants spontaneous midweek grilling rather than an all-afternoon event. As Annalise puts it, "If you like eating outside but don't want the mess or waiting around, this is for you." Its straightforward controls and quick heat-up time remove much of the intimidation factor, making it ideal for those who value convenience over ceremony.

That said, there are a couple of practical considerations to bear in mind. Because it's electric, you'll need access to a plug socket or extension lead, and while its compact design makes it easy to tuck away, you'll still want somewhere sheltered to store it between uses. "As long as you've got space to store it and a plug socket or extension lead, it's brilliant," Annalise says. "But you do need to think about where you're going to keep it protected....I’d include a cover for people who don’t have indoor storage,” Annalise also adds that she would like “an accessory tray for cooking things like onions or eggs.”

The long-term running costs are another major draw. Without the need to repeatedly buy charcoal or refill gas bottles, it's a surprisingly economical choice. "It saves money in the long run because you're not constantly buying gas or charcoal," Annalise explains. "The last time I filled my old gas BBQ it cost nearly £100, so this feels much more economical over time." Ultimately, this is a barbecue for people who prioritise ease, consistency and practicality, delivering great-tasting food without the fuss or learning curve of more traditional outdoor cooking setups.

Who might want something different?

That said, the Char-Broil Patio Bistro Cube E won't be the perfect fit for everyone. If barbecuing is your hobby rather than simply a means to get dinner on the table, you might find yourself wanting something larger and more specialised. Keen entertainers who regularly cook for big groups may prefer a gas barbecue with multiple burners, giving them separate cooking zones and enough space to juggle burgers, vegetables and sides all at once.

Likewise, traditionalists who love the ritual of lighting charcoal and chasing that distinctive smoky flavour will probably still gravitate towards a classic charcoal model. Serious barbecue enthusiasts interested in low-and-slow cooking, smoking brisket or experimenting with wood chips may also benefit from investing in a dedicated smoker or Kamado-style barbecue, which offer superior heat retention and greater versatility, albeit with a steeper learning curve and a much higher price tag.

The Cube E excels because it knows exactly what it is: a practical, uncomplicated solution for everyday outdoor cooking. As Annalise says, "It's a genius idea for people who don't have much time or don't want the faff of charcoal. It's especially great if you just want to eat outside without all the setup."

She felt that it was excellent value for money. "From what I’ve seen, if you go cheaper, the quality seems more flimsy," adds Annalise. "You get what you pay for as this looks great and works to a high standard – I'd buy it for myself if I could, for sure." However, if you see barbecuing as an event in itself, something to spend hours tending and perfecting, you may appreciate the extra capacity, flavour and flexibility that comes with a more traditional model.

Should you buy the Char Broil Patio Bistro Cube E barbcue?

The Char-Broil Patio Bistro Cube E is a brilliant, compact take on barbecuing. It strips away much of the mess, waiting and maintenance associated with traditional models, while still delivering the kind of performance that makes eating outdoors feel special. From its quick heat-up time and even cooking results to its compact, easy-to-store design, it's a practical upgrade for anyone who wants barbecued food to fit around their lifestyle, rather than the other way around.

Annalise certainly became a fan. "I would definitely recommend it, especially to women like me who just want something quick and easy to use," she says. "If you love eating outside but don't want the hassle and would prefer not to smell like charcoal, this makes it so much simpler."

I'm a big fan of Oura Ring, having worn the previous model every day and night since it was released a few years ago. In the world of fitness trackers, it's undeniably the best smart ring, with the most discreet design and reliable technology.

The Oura Ring 5 solves the gripes of previous models by packing the advanced technology into a smaller surface area and a design that looks more like jewellery than ever before.

A new model is released every few years, so I ordered the latest to find out if it was worth the upgrade. After just a few hours of wear, I noticed the biggest difference, but what else makes the Oura Ring 5 worth buying?

Oura Ring 5 review

Quick overview

The design improvements are more than just selling points. There are noticeable differences in the look and feel of the Oura Ring 4 and 5, more so than there were between the 3 and 4. It is thinner and very lightweight, making it easier than ever to wear 24/7, which is ultimately what you need to do to make the most of the continuous health tracking sensors.

It has a barely-there feel on the finger, complemented by the rich metallic colourways (I went for the rose gold) that make the Oura Ring 5 look deceptively like jewellery. I've regularly forgotten it's there over the last few days.

Historically, I've been cautious about wearing my ring in the gym after I scratched my gold Oura Ring 4 on a set of dumbbells a week in. The scratches were noticeable, and it brought down the premium look of the design. After reading that the Oura Ring 5 is made from a stronger, better scratch-resistant titanium, I hesitantly kept it on for my most recent workout. Examining it afterwards, I didn't notice a single scratch or sign of wear. Just to be careful, though, as I wear another tracker on my wrist in the gym that is linked to my ring, I'll probably take it off, but it's certainly an improvement for those who want to keep it on.

Software-wise, those who have had an Oura Ring before won't notice many changes, but the brand promises the insights are more accurate than ever thanks to new and improved sensors. I've also noticed the Advisor feature, an AI-led tool that helps answer specific questions about your data, is quicker and more accurate than before.

It has the same £5.99 subscription fee to access the insights, and you will need to order a (free) sizing kit, even if you've had a ring before, as the design means it sizes slightly differently.

Specifications

What is the Oura Ring 5 like to wear?

Measuring just over six millimetres wide, the new model is considerably thinner than previous versions, which have bordered on bulky. At 2g on average, it's also noticeably lighter, but it still feels durable.

You can wear the Oura Ring 5 on one of three fingers: index, middle, or ring finger, marking a change from previous models, which were worn on the index finger.

With the reintroduction of rose gold, which appears as a deep copper colour, there are also more colourways to choose from. Others include gold, brushed silver, stealth (deep grey), black, and silver.

It also has a longer battery life of six to nine days, compared to five to eight days, which I haven't noticed yet, but I'm sure will come to appreciate. I have noticed that as my rings get older (2+ years), battery life begins to dip significantly to about four days, which has been disappointing. I hope this changes with the Oura Ring 5.

Sleep tracking on the Oura Ring 5

The Oura Ring has always been my favourite sleep tracker. The improved design of the 5 makes it even more unobtrusive to wear overnight, and the low-profile sensors sit flush against the skin, so there's no chance of interruption with hand movement while asleep.

If you've worn an Oura Ring before, you'll know the drill. For those looking to invest in one for the first time, you'll find a plethora of advanced insights - including total sleep time, efficiency, restfulness, sleep stages (REM, deep, light), latency, and timing, which all feed into your daily Sleep Score. Once you've worn the ring for a few weeks, it'll pick up on your Body Clock and suggest a suitable bedtime for your routine and sleep needs. If you need more sleep, the Sleep Debt tab will highlight how many more hours to schedule.

One of my favourite features of the Oura world is the longer-term health features. While most fitness trackers will show you a live picture of your health, Oura takes it one step further, delivering Sleep Health insights over weeks, months, and years in the My Health tab, helping you look at the bigger picture.

Fitness tracking on the Oura Ring 5

The Oura Ring has never led with fitness insights. Rather, it uses your activity data to create the bigger picture of your health, be that your sleep needs, stress levels, heart health, or daily Readiness Score.

You do get a daily step count, daily calorie burn, automatically recorded workouts (with a GPS route recorded if it's outside), and manual workout modes you can enable. You can also retrospectively log activities. Key metrics (like hours of inactivity, training volume (how many workouts you've done), recovery time, and training frequency) can help plan your movement for the week.

It's undoubtedly impressive, and I would recommend it to anyone looking to move more and see how their exercise and weekly habits impact their fitness and overall health. I would say, however, that it's not as accurate for some activities and the step count can sometimes be overstated (but I haven't had the Oura Ring 5 long enough to see if this issue is present on the new model).

The design means you can't get live workout data, which would be essential for runners, cyclists, and other cardio lovers, so if this is you, I'd recommend one of the best running watches or best Garmin watches instead - or, if budget allows, to use alongside your Oura Ring 5.

Recently, I also weighed up the new Fitbit Air vs Oura Ring as the two have similar designs in a way, with two very different price tags.

Health tracking on the Oura Ring 5

Stress is another health pillar that the Oura Ring 5 focuses on, just as the 3 and 4 models did. You'll get an overview of your stress for the day (not all of which is bad stress, as activities like exercise influence it) and your Resilience Score, which is a longer-term marker of how well you are dealing with life's daily pressures. In the past, I've found this very useful to work out if I'm feeling the effects of a busy few weeks. When my Resilience is down, I focus more on sleep and recovery than exercise and socialising.

Cumulative Stress is another longer-term marker, using your sleep and activity data, along with temperature markers.

Together, when these are in flux, it can be a sign (along with other metrics) that your body is coming down with something. That's when the Symptom Radar will go off, and you'll get a notification that all is not well, and that maybe you could do with some downtime. I've seen this in the days before I get a cold, and it's given me a chance to stock up on vitamins before the symptoms hit.

Alongside the release of the Oura Ring 5 (they are also available on the previous model), new health-tracking features have been released. These include Health Radar, which warns about potential blood pressure and sleep breathing problems before they surface, and features for GLP-1 users to track their progress.

Is the Oura Ring 5 worth buying?

Yes, absolutely. At £399, it's the same price as the previous Oura Ring 4, while offering a better design with more advanced and accurate sensors that pick up a reading, no matter where the ring sits on your finger.

The colourways add a real premium feel to the upgrade as well, and I'd recommend the Deep Rose to anyone who normally wears gold as a pop of something different.

However, if you already have the Oura Ring 4 and it's working perfectly for you, then I'd say there's little reason to invest right now. The metrics remain the same, the app is the same, and future feature upgrades will also be available on this older model.

Also, if you are looking to buy the gold metallic design (£499 in the 5), then you'll find this on sale in the previous model for £100 less - now £399.

The people at Montane are experts when it comes to designing durable outdoor clothing, so when I found myself in need of a reliable, functional jacket for a hiking holiday, I reached straight for their Vortic Waterproof Jacket.

Despite the recent heatwave, there’s no denying that every British wardrobe needs one of the best waterproof jackets. Prepped to protect you from any type of sudden downpour, much like the best wellies and the best sunglasses, they’re all-season essentials. I’ve often found waterproof jackets to be too sweaty in the summer, so finding one in the warmer months can be a tricky task. I was keen to avoid anything too heavy or warm and reach for something lightweight and breathable instead, which is where the Vortic stepped in.

British clothing brand Montane has been engineering mountain-ready clothing for over 30 years, so I knew it would fare pretty well on my Lake District holiday, but being a fashion editor, I was also after something a bit more stylish. Could the Vortic Waterproof Jacket be both practical and stylish? Here’s everything you need to know.

Montane Vortic Waterproof Jacket: Function & technology

What better way to put a mountain-proof jacket (and me!) through its paces than climbing the tallest mountain in England - Scafell Pike. Anyone who has been to The Lake District will know the weather can change in an instant, so layers are key.

Whilst I would need this jacket to keep me dry (it is the Lakes after all!), it also needed to be lightweight enough for when I got too hot when climbing. Thankfully, the Vortic delivered in every aspect.

The Petrichor technology keeps rain and wind out while allowing heat and moisture to escape. There’s no denying this jacket is fully waterproof; not a drop got in. I also really liked the underarm zips for extra ventilation, which came in especially handy when I worked up a sweat. Other key features include offset seams for comfort and easy movement, and the peak hood for extra protection on the face. Once I reached the summit, it wasn’t raining but was a lot cooler, so it worked its magic in keeping the wind out too.

It has two front zip pockets to safely store valuables - I used it for my phone and keys, and there was plenty of room.

Montane Vortic Waterproof Jacket: Fit & Style

I wore my standard size, a UK size 8 and found it fit perfectly. It has a fitted silhouette, which makes it feel quite sleek but still allows plenty of room if you want to layer underneath. I wore a T-shirt and a slim fleece underneath mine.

I went for the lilac haze colour, which felt perfect for spring, but it also comes in two other equally chic colours - pink clay and mulberry. The muted colour offering really sets it above the rest, making it seem more fashionable than a selection of brighter hues.

As well as using it for hiking, I also wanted a jacket that I could wear with the best jeans for wandering around the charming Lake District towns, and I found the Vortic also slotted in really well with my everyday wardrobe. I could certainly get away with wearing this on a rainy commute back in London.

Montane Vortic Waterproof Jacket: Cleaning & Care

Montane’s products are built to last a lifetime, so although they make a hefty dent in the wallet initially, expect to wear their pieces forever. Montane is also committed to creating sustainable designs, with the Vortic Waterproof Jacket also containing a considerable amount of recycled fabrics.

It can be machine-washed at 30 degrees, making it super easy to keep clean and well looked-after, ensuring that lifetime guarantee.

Montane Vortic Waterproof Jacket: Verdict

Due to the high-end technology, the Vortic doesn’t come cheap at £240, so it’s certainly a considered investment. Designed for hiking and walking, if this is an activity you regularly do, then the Vortic Waterproof Jacket is a no-brainer and the best technical waterproof jacket I have come across. From beginners to experts, it’s a jacket that works for everyone, whether you’re embarking on your first walking holiday or your 50th, but it’s certainly worth considering cost-per-wear and how often you will use it.

Of course, if you’re looking for a waterproof coat recommendation that is a bit more fashionable, this Rains design would be a better choice, although it doesn’t beat Montane’s technical aspects when it comes to more adventurous walks and hikes.

So for a high-tech all-rounder that can be taken from the mountains to the everyday, Montane’s Vortic Waterproof jacket makes a worthy investment.

How to wear yours

It seems like Dyson are on a roll. From rethinking their classic cordless vacuums to introducing ultra-slim, pencil-style innovations, the brand has reshaped the way many of us clean our homes. And this has never been clearer than with the launch of the Dyson PencilWash. It's mopping, but not like you know it.

As someone who regularly tests some of the best steam cleaners and best Dysons on the market, news of the Dyson PencilWash was enough to stop me mid clean. These newer models are a really new step in the floorcare industry, offering an ultra-slim design with a hygienic roller system that constantly refreshes and sanitises as you clean.

It leans into Dyson’s signature focus on sleek engineering and effortless performance. In practice, it sits somewhere between a mop and a floor washer, but with the polish and precision you’d expect from one of the best Dysons yet and it’s already changing expectations of what “clean floors” really look like.

Dyson PencilWash review

• RRP: £299.99
• Dimensions: 266.5mm (L) x 198.3mm (W) x 1,158mm (H)
• Weight: 2.2 kg (full machine), 380g in hand
• Runtime: Up to 30 minutes
• Charge time: 3.5 hours
• Handle size: 38mm
• Water tank capacity: 300ml (clean), 360ml (dirty)
• Floor coverage: 100m²

Who would the Dyson PencilWash suit?

The Dyson PencilWash is essentially a more powerful, thorough, and technical upgrade on your traditional mop. With that in mind, it will suit households that prioritise ease, speed and a consistently clean finish on hard floors rather than intensive deep-cleaning power.

It’s particularly well matched to busy homes with pets, children, or high-traffic areas like kitchens and open-plan living spaces, where spills and marks appear daily and need dealing with quickly and hygienically.

It also love how the Dyson PencilWash would appeal to design-conscious users who already own Dyson vacuums and want a cohesive, lightweight cleaning system that feels intuitive and effortless to use. If you prefer low-effort maintenance cleaning that feels almost meditative to use, this is perfect.

What is the Dyson PencilWash like to use?

The first thing you need to do is add water to the Dyson PencilWash. This is surprisingly simple and, importantly, very clean in execution. The clean water tank clicks into place with that familiar Dyson precision, and I’ve found it easy to top up at the sink without any splashing or awkward angles.

Once filled and reassembled the PencilWash feels reassuringly balanced in the hand and light enough to carry between rooms, but solid enough that it never feels flimsy or underpowered. There’s a similar design language here to the Dyson PencilVac, particularly in the ultra-slim profile and pared-back, almost architectural feel of the handle.

You might already know that the 38mm handle is one of the Dyson features that the brand shouts about. It's the same size as their hair tools and sits wonderfully comfortably in the hand. The self-propelled base of the PencilWash drives it in a way that makes it feel like you are floating the mop across the floor, rather than pushing and scrubbing, as some other steam cleaners do. It's an unbelievably premium experience.

The PencilWash is really designed for hard floor cleaning, so this is where it comes into its own. The first thing I noticed, alongside that floating feeling, is just how nimble and light this is. At around the 2kg mark, it feels incredibly light in use, and the weight distribution does a lot of the work for you.

I tested it on everyday kitchen spills and dried-on marks, and the combination of constant clean water flow and rotating microfibre roller lifted grime quickly without needing repeated passes. Dried soy sauce and tomato ketchup lifted on the first pass in most cases, except when I left large spills for over 12 hours, which is an unlikely experience you'll have in your home.

I expected to feel like it was scrubbing the floor, or, at the very least, like I would be working up a sweat, but I hardly even knew it was working. The only way I could tell was the clean floor appearing after each pass.

The small and nimble head also makes manoeuvring around table legs and tight corners feel easy. There’s a real sense of strength in the cleaning power despite the minimal effort required to use it, which is where Dyson has clearly tried to bridge performance with ease. Like the PencilVac, it leans heavily into that idea of ultra-light, precision cleaning, but here, it’s the sensation of a continuous, polished glide over hard floors that makes it feel genuinely different from a traditional mop or even most electric floor cleaners.

How does the Dyson PencilWash compare?

I like to compare every product to similar models so that you get a clear sense of where it sits in the market, but the PencilWash is a particularly tricky category to place. Unlike many Dyson products, this isn’t a vacuum cleaner at all, which removes one of the most obvious comparison points. Instead, I’d position it somewhere between an electric mop with water circulation and a lightweight steam cleaner. I’ve seen some reviewers describe it as a “mop hybrid,” which feels like a very fitting way to frame it.

If you’re using a traditional mop but feel ready for a more powerful, hygienic upgrade, this sits in that sweet spot. It takes away the physical effort of scrubbing and, crucially, the constant refresh of clean water makes a noticeable difference when you’re going over the same mark repeatedly. On the other hand, if you’re comparing it to steam cleaners, it’s important to note that this is a gentler, lower-intensity clean. It won’t match the deep sanitising heat or heavy-duty stain removal of more industrial-style machines, but it does feel faster and more controlled for everyday use.

For Dyson’s own range, the closest point of reference is the Dyson V15 Submarine. While the V15 remains one of the most powerful cordless vacuums on the market, the PencilWash occupies a completely different role in the cleaning ecosystem. Where the V15 lifts and captures dirt and then can be swapped in for mopping with the same technology as the PencilWash, the PencilWash simply washes. The PencilWash is more complementary than comparable.

Should you buy the Dyson PencilWash?

If you’re someone who already owns a solid vacuum but finds traditional mopping frustrating, inconsistent, or simply too time-consuming, this is a compelling upgrade. It makes most sense for sealed hard floors and everyday spill-prone homes, where the appeal lies in speed, hygiene and ease rather than heavy-duty deep cleaning.

However, if you’re expecting it to replace a high-performance steam cleaner or tackle deeply ingrained, long-neglected stains, it will feel more limited in scope. In short, this is less about raw cleaning power and more about refinement, a sleek, effortless way to keep floors consistently fresh with minimal thought or effort, in true Dyson fashion.

How we test mops and vacuums

At woman&home, we have a series of standardised tests that we put all of our steam cleaners and mops through. We look at what surfaces and functions they are best used on and work across those with stains ranging from soy sauce to tomato ketchup. We also look at how powerful they are and how easy they are to use and clean. If you want to find out more about how we test mops and steam cleaners, you can visit our dedicated page.

Getting a slice of the pizza oven action is usually pricey and comes with all sorts of compromises. That's precisely why I’m so excited by the Kenwood My Pizzeria. It’s designed to take a lot of the friction out of pizza-making at home, with the promise of indoor and outdoor cooking, a compact footprint, and a simplicity that makes it feel far less intimidating than most entry-level pizza ovens.

Even the best pizza ovens tend to demand a trade-off somewhere, whether that’s storage, weather dependency, or a hefty price tag. However, when Kenwood announced the launch of My Pizzeria, they challenged all the norms. This is one of the more accessible ovens I’ve tested, especially at its under-£100-on-offer price point, and its ability to move between kitchen counter and courtyard is what really makes it an upper crust oven.

From my perspective, having grown up around a family pizza business, the Kenwood My Pizzeria is even more impressive for just how easy it is to get consistent results without a steep learning curve. It’s compact enough to tuck away in a drawer, straightforward to use from the first try, and feels like a practical way into pizza-making rather than a specialist bit of kit you have to master over time. And for that reason, it'll be my recommendation for anyone who wants an oven that works all year round.

Kenwood My Pizzeria Pizza Oven review

• RRP: £149.99
• Colours: storm blue, black
• Dimensions: 18.5 x 35.2 x 36 mm (H x W x D)
• Weight: 4.7 kgs
• Power: 1500 watts
• Temperature range: 0-400°C,

Who would the Kenwood My Pizzeria Pizza Oven suit?

The Kenwood My Pizzeria will suit anyone who wants the fun of pizza-making without the usual cost, complexity, or commitment that comes with a full-sized outdoor oven. At under £100 (on offer), it’s particularly good for first-timers who are curious about pizza ovens but not ready to invest in something bulky, expensive, or weather-dependent, which most other ovens are.

It also works well for people with limited space. Because it can be used indoors and outdoors, and stores away easily, it’s ideal for smaller kitchens, rented homes, or anyone who doesn’t have a dedicated outdoor cooking setup. If you have a deep drawer, you can easily slot this in there. It's no more demanding than a food processor and possibly less than a stand mixer. That flexibility is a big part of its appeal, you’re not locked into needing a garden or perfect weather to use it.

From my experience, it’s also a strong fit for casual cooks rather than pizza purists. If you want reliable, decent homemade pizzas without needing to obsess over dough hydration, heat zones, or long preheat times, this is a very forgiving place to start. It won’t replace a high-performance outdoor oven for serious enthusiasts, but it absolutely lowers the barrier to entry in a way that makes pizza night feel easy and repeatable.

Unboxing the Kenwood My Pizzeria Pizza Oven

I’m used to pizza ovens arriving on pallets, requiring a team of people to manoeuvre, so when the Kenwood My Pizzeria turned up in a compact, relatively lightweight box, I genuinely had to double-check I hadn’t been sent the wrong product. But opening it up quickly proved me wrong. Kenwood has done an impressive job of keeping the packaging both efficient and reassuringly well thought-through.

Inside, the oven is almost fully assembled, which is a refreshing change if you’re used to the faff of setting up larger models. You simply slot the pizza stone into place, peel off the protective blue film from the two included pizza peels, and you’re essentially ready to go. It’s a genuinely minimal setup process, which makes it feel far more accessible than most entry-level pizza ovens.

From a sustainability standpoint, the packaging also feels considered. It’s compact, well-organised, and avoids unnecessary excess, which means it scores highly straight out of the box. For a product at this price point, that attention to detail is a welcome bonus and sets a positive tone before you’ve even switched it on.

What is the Kenwood My Pizzeria Pizza Oven like to use?

As an electric pizza oven, it’s really easy to get to grips with how this works. At the rear of the oven, there’s a temperature dial alongside a mechanical timer, both clearly labelled with enough resistance to feel precise without being stiff to adjust. You’ll want to keep the lid firmly closed during preheating, though, the radiant heat coming off the upper and lower elements is intense, and you can immediately feel it if you lean over the chamber for too long.

I always season a pizza stone before first use, so I gave the Kenwood a full 30-minute heat cycle before cooking. That initial blast helps burn off any manufacturing residue while also fully saturating the stone with heat, which is key for getting an evenly cooked base and proper oven spring on the crust.

One of the Kenwood’s biggest strengths is its compact cooking chamber. Because there’s such a small internal volume to heat, it comes up to temperature remarkably quickly. There’s an indicator light at the back that shows when the elements are actively heating, but in practice, by the time I’d rolled out a dough ball and added toppings, the oven was already ready to cook.

I tested several styles of pizza, ranging from simple margheritas to vegetable-heavy combinations. Given that this is an electric oven, I initially expected cook times of around five minutes, but the dual heating elements completely changed that assumption. With direct heat coming from both above and below the stone, pizzas were consistently cooking in under three minutes. Across testing, the average cook time landed at 2 minutes and 32 seconds.

That proved to be the sweet spot for this oven. The mozzarella blistered and bubbled beautifully, the crust puffed with impressive oven spring, and the underside developed genuine leopard spotting rather than simply drying out. The heat distribution is particularly impressive for such a compact electric unit. If you prefer a crispier, more Roman-style finish, you can dial the temperature back slightly and extend the cook time without risking burnt toppings, but for Neapolitan-style results, I thought the default performance was excellent.

It’s worth noting that you’ll need a light dusting of flour or semolina on both the stone and the paddles before launching your pizza. The split paddle design is genuinely clever — separating into two halves makes both launching and retrieving pizzas much easier in such a compact oven — but raw dough will cling to the metal if you skip the flour. You do need to be restrained, though, as excess flour can scorch quickly at these temperatures and leave a bitter taste on the base.

What is the Kenwood My Pizzeria like at making s'mores?

Once I’d perfected pizzas, I moved on to some of Kenwood’s more unconventional serving suggestions. As someone who always wants dessert after dinner, I couldn’t resist trying the suggested s’mores setup.

I started with a biscuit base topped with chocolate and marshmallows, then closed the lid for around ten minutes. Through the viewing window, I could see the marshmallows gradually turning golden and beginning to collapse into the chocolate underneath. Visibility through the window isn’t perfect because there’s no overhead element directly above that section, but angling yourself slightly makes it much easier to monitor browning.

The end result was surprisingly good. The marshmallows were soft and caramelised, the chocolate had melted into an almost liquid centre, and the biscuits warmed through without going soggy. It recreated that campfire-style flavour surprisingly well, but with far more consistency and none of the smoke or mess.

What is the Kenwood My Pizzeria Pizza Oven like at cooking Croissants?

Kenwood also suggests using the oven to warm pastries, and it works brilliantly for breakfast items if you’re not fully committed to leftover pizza the next morning. Pain au chocolat and croissants heat through incredibly quickly thanks to the dual-sided heat.

I’d strongly recommend running the oven at its lowest setting for pastries, though. I burnt my first batch of croissants by underestimating how aggressively the top and bottom elements work together. Adding a light splash of water before reheating helped restore some moisture and gave the pastries a fresher, bakery-style finish. Once I’d adjusted the settings, croissants came out steaming hot with crisp outer layers and soft, fluffy interiors in barely a minute. At that point, using a conventional oven or air fryer started to feel unnecessary.

What is the Kenwood My Pizzeria Pizza Oven like at making toasties?

The Kenwood also handles toasties, grilled cheese sandwiches, and bagels surprisingly well. Bagels, in particular, became a bit of an obsession during testing. The compact cavity and intense top heat gave them a crisp exterior while keeping the inside chewy, and it quickly turned into a routine of experimenting with both sweet and savoury toppings throughout the week. By the end of testing, I was taking custom bagel orders from everyone else in the house.

And those are really just snapshots of what this oven can do. What impressed me most about the Kenwood is that it genuinely feels like more than a single-purpose pizza oven. It makes high-heat cooking accessible, quick, and surprisingly versatile without demanding a huge amount of kitchen space or technical skill.

Cleaning and maintaining the Kenwood My Pizzeria Pizza Oven

In terms of cleaning, you should avoid getting the pizza stone wet. Like all pizza stones, it will naturally darken and develop char marks after the first few uses, but that’s completely normal and actually a sign that the stone is properly seasoned.

For maintenance, I’d recommend using a brass-bristle brush to remove any burnt flour or baked-on food debris once the stone has completely cooled. A quick dry wipe afterwards is usually all that’s needed.

Kenwood has very deliberately designed this oven with storage in mind, and that alone makes it stand out in the pizza oven market. The slim profile meant we could slide it into a deep kitchen drawer normally reserved for smaller appliances like the toastie maker and mini blender. If you’re short on worktop space or don’t want a bulky outdoor pizza oven permanently on display, this is one of the most practical options I’ve tested.

How does the Kenwood My Pizzeria compare?

The Kenwood really feels like a first-of-its-kind product, but the closest comparison is probably the Ooni Volt. Technically, the Volt can also be used indoors, but in practice I found it significantly heavier and bulkier, especially when compared directly with the Kenwood’s compact footprint.

The Ooni undeniably feels premium. The build quality is excellent, the design is sleek, and it’s clearly engineered with serious pizza enthusiasts in mind. If you want an indoor/outdoor oven capable of handling larger pizzas and frequent outdoor cooking sessions, the Ooni still has the edge.

Where the Kenwood wins is accessibility and convenience. It’s compact, easier to store, heats incredibly quickly, and feels less intimidating for everyday use. If versatility, space-saving design, and value for money are priorities, the Kenwood becomes a very compelling option.

Should you buy the Kenwood My Pizzeria Pizza Oven?

It's incredibly rare to find a pizza oven like this. It's ultra compact, reasonably priced and can be used both indoors and outdoors too. I consider myself a pizza snob, having grown up in a family that has run a pizza business for more than a decade, but the Kenwood won me over with its combination of convenience and performance. It delivers the high temperatures needed for crisp, well-cooked pizzas, yet feels far less intimidating than many specialist ovens. While dedicated enthusiasts might still gravitate towards larger gas or wood-fired models, the Kenwood fills a gap in the market that few brands have addressed: a genuinely versatile pizza oven that's easy to store, simple to use, and capable of producing impressive results without demanding a huge budget or outdoor space. For most households, that's a very compelling combination.

How we test pizza ovens

At woman&home we have a series of standardised tests that we put all of our pizza ovens though. From classic margheritas to loaded vegetable pizzas, we like to work through a whole menu to see how the oven copes across the board. With the Kenwood, we could test more than just Italian food, from croissants and toasties through to s'mores and cookies. It was great to get a good sense of how versatile the oven is as well as what it's like to clean. If you want to find out more, you can visit out dedicated page on how we test pizza ovens.

If you're new to running, navigating the waters of finding a suitable watch to record your progress can be difficult. One of the best Garmin watches is often the go-to, but until very recently, there were few beginner-friendly options. The Garmin Forerunner 170, released last month, has changed this.

I've been running regularly for six years now and have tested pretty much every fitness tracker brand under the sun. The Forerunner range consistently comes up as a favourite, so I was very excited for this one.

Complete with new training features, a bright and easy-to-use interface, and exciting colourways, it impressed me before I even opened the box. To find out if it's worth the spend, I took it out for two weeks, seven runs, and three gym sessions.

Garmin Forerunner 170 review

Specifications

• Size: One size - 42.6 x 42.6 x 11.9 mm
• Weight: 41 g
• Display: AMOLED
• Material: Silicone, glass, fibre-reinforced polymer
• Battery life: Up to 10 days
• Waterproof: 5ATM

What is the Garmin Forerunner 170 like to wear?

Previous Garmin watches, such as the Venu 4 (another woman&home favourite), have come in two sizes. This one is just the one size, but it fit snugly within the margins of my wrist, and the typeface on the screen was large enough to see clearly on the move.

The AMOLED screen makes for a premium experience when running and in daily life, with notifications displaying clearly whatever the light, and it's also touchscreen. I typically turn off the touchscreen on my running watches, as I have a habit of nudging them, but this screen isn't overly sensitive, so I didn't have that issue this time. There are also five buttons on the device. You can use these as well as, or instead of, the touchscreen.

I did turn off the notifications and buzzing, however. I don't know whether these are louder on this watch compared to others, but it felt overly reactive for starting a run, pausing a session, and at every kilometre logged.

In the sea of black and white fitness trackers, the colourways of the Garmin Forerunner 170 Music are a refreshing change. While these neutrals are still an option, and even more so in the regular 170, the fun pop of pink and yellow, blue and green, and yellow in the black option of the 170 Music remind me of retro kids' watches in the best possible way. I loved the colourways of the Forerunner 265, and these are even bolder.

What is the Garmin Forerunner 170 like to run with?

I took the Garmin Forerunner 170 for a spin over two weeks, wearing it through my regular long, speed, and easy runs. Along with the regular on-screen data, such as distance, pace, training zone, and live heart rate, you'll get race time predictions, race pace tools, and VO2 estimates.

All your workout data and daily movement is recorded in the Garmin app, which has stayed the same and remains free and easy to use.

What makes this watch different from cheaper options, like the Forerunner 165, is the premium training insights. Having worn a Garmin for a few years, I have found these to be some of the most useful features for improving my overall lifestyle, with the view to being a better runner.

Training Status reveals how your body is adapting to the workouts you're doing. While I have found it disheartening to see 'Detraining' as my Status, the feature does tell you what you need to do to get back to improving again. For me, this time around, the suggestion was to do more anaerobic exercise, so I incorporated more sprints into my routine and watched my Status improve.

Training Readiness estimates how 'ready' your body is for exercise, balancing recovery metrics with workout data. As all your progress actually takes place when you're resting, this is a worthwhile feature for anyone looking to graduate from a beginner running level.

I was also impressed by the inclusion of new Garmin Coach models - Cycling Coach, Strength Coach, and Fitness Coach. While Running Coach has been a feature on other devices, offering training plans for various goals, extending them to these activities makes the Garmin Forerunner 170 a brilliant all-rounder as well as a specialist running watch.

You'll also find over a hundred workout profiles, with options from Boxing and Rowing to Padel and Paddleboarding.

How does it to compare?

Overall, it's absolutely packed out with features - and I haven't even mentioned the sleep tracking, which is the same as on every other Garmin. You'll get insights into your duration and sleep quality, with suggestions to improve.

You'll struggle to find another watch with the same features for this price. The next best option is another new release, the Garmin Forerunner 70, which comes in at £219. It has the same Training Readiness and Status features but lacks the barometric altimeter, which you'll need if you're a hiker, trail runner, or stair climber; music capabilities; the Garmin Pay option, and skin temperature sensors. The latter is needed if you track your menstrual cycle with your fitness tracker.

Outside of Garmin, the only other I can think of is the Coros Pace 4. It's my favourite running watch overall, but lacks a lot of the support for non-running activities.

Is the Garmin Forerunner 170 worth buying?

I knew the Garmin Forerunner 170 Music was going to be a favourite straight out of the box - but I couldn't judge the watch by its appearance. After testing it for two weeks, though, I stand by my first impression.

Many beginner-friendly watches lack longevity. While they may be cheap and cheerful, perfect for getting you started as a new runner, they won't be able to offer enough a few years (or even months) down the line if you decide you want to do more than just track your workouts.

The Garmin Forerunner 170 Music doesn't fit into this box. This watch would help improve your running speed, form, and recovery in a meaningful and productive way, and help you extend your distance to a marathon and beyond. Its advanced sensors, insights, and plethora of features easily make it worth the investment.

Most other beginner watches sit around the £150 mark, including the Forerunner 55, which is dated now but will do all the essentials and comes in at under £120 in the sale. There are also cheaper Garmin options for your budget and goals.

After three years, Fitbit has finally released another device - and the Fitbit Air has certainly been worth the wait. This device works a little differently from the best Fitbits that have come before, losing the screen in favour of the new Google Health app (that iPhone users can also download) with a complete suite of health and fitness tracking features.

I've been testing the best fitness trackers for five years, and have had my hands on everything from the latest Oura Ring to the brand new Garmin Forerunner 170. While these are among my favourites, the Fitbit Air does something unique: it combines your health data with a path forward, and it does it for under £85, with no subscription.

Whether you're a dedicated hiker and gym-goer or just want to get fitter with more steps and better sleep in 2026, I'd recommend the Fitbit Air.

Google Fitbit Air review

Specifications

• Size: One size, 130-210 mm around
• Weight: 12g with band
• Display: None
• Material: Recycled polycarbonate and plastic with textile band, stainless steel buckle
• Battery life: 7 days
• Waterproof: Up to 50m

What is the Fitbit Air like to wear?

If you're familiar with the Whoop band, one of the first screenless devices, then you'll know this design. In the textile strap, you'll find the hub of the Fitbit Air - a bean-shaped tracker that sits flush against the wrist and monitors your heart rate, skin temperature, and blood oxygen.

If you're not, then welcome to the new world of notification-free, screenless fitness trackers. Instead of viewing your steps, sleep, and other data on your wrist, you'll find it all in the new Google Health app, which you'll need to download from your phone's app store.

The textile strap (interchangeable with silicone options from Google's online store) is fully adjustable and loops around the wrist, securing with a velcro tab. I found it slightly itchy on the first day I wore it, but this feeling was gone by the third, and after that, I completely forgot it was there.

While it's not as discreet as other faceless trackers (like a smart ring, for example), it would easily be missed in casual settings if you opted for the discreet black colourway. Only those 'in the know' would know. The stainless steel buckle is a nice touch that adds a premium feel to this otherwise very budget-friendly device.

What is the Fitbit Air like to use?

I wore the Fitbit Air for 10 days before finalising my review. This gave the watch enough time to fully calibrate my Readiness Score (a gauge of your body's recovery that tells you how much effort you should put into exercise on a given day) and get used to my body, so by the end of the testing period, all my data was correct. Even the step count got more accurate as time went on.

In the Google Health app, you'll find all the data you'd normally have on your screen, including your step count for the day so far, sleep metrics, live heart rate, and calories burned so far, and more. Distance covered and days spent exercising this week are now also on the homepage's main tab, and you can log how much water you've drunk, keep an eye on your weight (if that's a priority), and set up cycle tracking.

Instead of having to tap through to your workout and manually start it, the Fitbit Air automatically picks up the exercise you're doing and logs it as an activity. This is one of my favourite features on all Fitbits, but I found it's especially accurate on this device.

All your workouts are viewable in the 'Fitness' tab at the bottom, right next to your detailed sleep and overall health data tabs.

I'd say the pivot in design makes this Fitbit the easiest to use of the bunch. There's no tapping, scrolling, or swiping needed to use this watch. You can just leave it on your wrist, and it does all the work for you - refreshing. I also appreciated the loss of on-wrist notifications. While some people won't like this, the freedom to simply live my life undisturbed by my fitness tracker, while still having all that data to hand, was joyous.

Why is the Fitbit Air so good for beginners?

The shining star of the Fitbit Air is the integration with Google's Gemini AI. This is where beginners will really get the most for their money, but even if you're a seasoned fitness enthusiast, you'll see huge benefits - I certainly did.

When you log into the app and link up your Fitbit Air, you'll be led through the start-up process, where you'll tell the platform what your goals are, how much exercise you do at the moment, and any limiting factors you have. From here, you'll get a weekly exercise plan you can follow, and Gemini will follow it with you, giving you detailed insights into every workout and updates throughout the day on your recovery.

Speaking to those new to exercise, as I often do in my job, and remembering what it was like myself, I know how hard it can be to get started. Simply knowing where to start is the hardest part, and the Fitbit Air takes away this problem completely. You'll get genuinely useful insights with practical steps to take forward, instead of a dump of data that's hard to know what to do with.

If you invest in Google Health Premium (£7.50 per month) then you'll also be able to access a bank of workouts to follow, including walking, running, and cycling workouts from Peloton, at no further cost.

Everyone who buys a Fitbit Air gets three months of Google Health Premium for free on sign-up - just be sure to cancel this before it charges you, if you want to. For the cost, however, I'd say it's well worth the investment if you're looking to make serious changes to your health.

Sleep tracking on the Fitbit Air

In the morning, Gemini will give you an overview of your sleep, highlighting positive areas and points for improvement. Instead of having to dig into the data yourself, it's all there, laid out in sentences on the homepage every morning.

It's so refreshing to have everything there on the screen, with the option to dive into the data if you want to.

All you have to do is wear the Fitbit Air to bed. I've tested and had trouble wearing other Fitbits, like the Versa 4, to bed as the bright screen randomly turned on in the middle of the night, waking me up. With this screenless device, you don't have that problem. I also found the thin band significantly more comfortable than most other fitness trackers I've tried.

What are the new health features on the Fitbit Air?

The 'Health' page on the Google Health app has been completely redesigned, offering five vitals at a glance, to help you keep an eye on your health. Gemini is not a doctor, so this is where the AI functionality bows out, but you'll be able to see whether it's in your personal range after wearing the device for a few days.

These vitals are your breathing rate, blood oxygen saturation, resting heart rate, heart rate variability, and skin temperature variation. Together, they can tell you a lot about your health, from the chances of getting ill in the next few days to potential heart issues.

You can then take this information to your doctor, who may find it useful to get a gauge of your symptoms over the past few weeks or months.

This tab also acts as your personal data pocket. You can store your medical records here and data on your allergies, conditions, and other history that a health professional (should they need to in an emergency) can access.

Are there any downsides to this watch?

Naturally, if you are someone who likes to use your fitness tracker as a watch as much as a health data sensor, then the Fitbit Air won't be for you. Equally, if you just want the basics without extra information (maybe because you already know what the metrics mean), then you could benefit from the Fitbit Inspire 3, which is the same price.

To make the most use of the data, you'll want to continue paying for Google Health's Premium subscription. At £7.50 per month, it's a consideration. But, of all the workout apps you could invest in, this is hands-down the best value for money. Along with all the extra health and fitness insights, you'll get access to a bank of workouts (a Peloton app subscription is at least £12.99), sleep meditations and music.

Missing from the app, however, are recipes. On the original Fitbit Premium app, there were a handful of tasty recipes you could follow, with all the calories and macronutrients already tracked. If you were looking to eat healthier or lose weight, this was a huge feature. It's the only downside I found of using this device, but it's about the Google Health platform, rather than the Fitbit Air itself.

Finally, even though the Fitbit Air takes your data into account when recommending workouts and lifestyle changes, it's not a person. It's AI, which, famously, can make mistakes. So, it's always important to listen to your body and if something doesn't feel right for you, don't do it.

Is the Fitbit Air worth buying?

When I first saw that Google was releasing a new Fitbit, I was so excited. Combining all the elements of this fitness tracker with the powerhouse technology of Google was always going to produce something good (and I've seen it already in the Google Pixel 4 and Fitbit Charge 6), but the Fitbit Air is the very best of the bunch.

To call it a fitness tracker is almost an insult as its complete suite of health monitoring features makes it a true wellbeing companion, suitable for everyone from those trying exercise for the first time through to enthusiasts looking to optimise their routine for the better. As the AI is trained to work with your data, it doesn't matter your starting point. All of this, for under £85 upfront, is unheard of.

As a trained barista, I’ve always believed that texture is what separates a good drink from a truly exceptional one. It’s the gloss on a chocolate, the silkiness of a latte, the airy lift of a cold foam. And yet, when it comes to recreating that at home, it’s usually the element that falls short.

Even with one of the best coffee machines, cold foam remains elusive. Most setups simply aren’t designed to create that fine, velvety microfoam without heat. So when I saw the Nespresso NanoFoamer, which promises café-quality results for just £40, I was immediately intrigued.

After testing it across everything from iced matcha to cold chocolate, I can say this with confidence: it’s a true coffee station essential: a small, beautiful upgrades that quietly transforms your daily ritual into something far more indulgent.

Nespresso NanoFoamer

• RRP: £40
• Dimensions: 234 x 35 x35 mm
• Weight: 150g
• Charge: 1x USB-C to USB-C cable
• Foam types: airy and dense
•  Voltage: 3.7V Power: 5.18Wh

Who would the Nespresso NanoFoamer suit?

The Nespresso NanoFoamer sits in that sweet spot I’m always looking for: affordable luxury. At £40, it’s not an impulse buy, but it delivers refinement and luxury that you’d usually find with much more expensive kit. If you care about the details: texture, presentation, that café-style finish this will have you more than exciting.

It’s particularly well-suited to anyone building a coffee station at home, whether you’re a casual iced latte drinker or someone, like me, who obsesses over extraction and milk structure. It also makes a brilliant entry point for those who don’t want to invest in a full espresso setup but still want that elevated, barista-style finish.

What is the Nespresso NanoFoamer like to use?

From the moment you pick it up, the Nespresso NanoFoamer feels premium. The design is sleek and weighty, with a finish that wouldn’t look out of place alongside high-end coffee equipment. It’s simple, sleek, and very chic.

Of course, the most exciting element is the foam. You can whisk matcha into water, but getting foam is really where this shines. You can create anything from a light, airy froth to a denser, creamier layer, depending on how you use it. As a barista, I was particularly impressed by the consistency of the microfoam: fine, glossy, and stable enough to sit beautifully on top of iced drinks.

It also performs brilliantly with plant-based milks. Oat, almond, even coconut all achieved a surprisingly silky texture, which is often where cheaper frothers fall down.

Using the Nespresso NanoFoamer for iced matcha

Whisking is one of the tenets of matcha making, so I was excited to use this in two ways. The first is whisking matcha powder with water. It works beautifully as a modern alternative to a traditional whisk, creating a smooth, lump-free blend.

Then, when you want to whisk up your milk to get a delicate foam to pour on top, the whisk can switch stations. I used dairy milk, vegan milk (oat and almond) and even made cold foam with some cream in other recipes. You can see how thick and glossy the foam is in the image. The cold foam was like drinking whipped cream. In terms of matcha, I'm sold with the Nespresso NanoFoamer. It's less rustic than a bamboo whisk, but undeniably luxurious. If you’re someone who enjoys iced matcha lattes, this is a small upgrade that makes a noticeable difference.

Using the Nespresso NanoFoamer for iced coffee

Cold foam and iced coffees are where the NanoFoamer comes up against my high standards. As a committed coffee drinker and qualified barista, I'm protective about my coffee milks more than anywhere else, but the NanoFoamer still managed to impress me. On iced lattes, it creates that silky, cloud-like layer you’d expect from a speciality café and it holds really well. Even non-dairy milks didn't collapse immediately, with the cold foam sitting on top of the coffee.

Using the Nespresso NanoFoamer for iced chocolate

If you’re someone who leans towards sweeter drinks, the NanoFoamer will become even more irresistible. On iced chocolate, it was incredibly versatile., I used the whisk to mix my cocoa and chocolate together, with some milk in a smooth a glossy, paste. Then, I whisked my milk to a beautiful, glossy foam, which poured over the chocolate mix to give an almost dessert-like finish, which thick enough to feel decadent, but still light on the palate. It gives the drink a sense of occasion, transforming it from something quick into something you’d genuinely look forward to.

Should you buy the Nespresso NanoFoamer?

I love all the little details when it comes to my home coffee station and the NanoFoamer brings all the things that I look for: texture, finish, a café-quality feel. The best thing is that it isn't a huge investment either. It'll enhance your drinks, delivering a luxury upgrade to your home cold foam drinks.

I have been testing out the very best bras for woman&home for a while now, and after covering everything from classic plunge and push-up pieces to soft triangle and strapless designs, I thought that my boobs and I had covered all bases when it comes to lingerie. That was until I discovered the Evelyn & Bobbie Structured Scoop Bra Tank, which really is unlike anything else in my underwear drawer.

I have long been a fan of the Evelyn & Bobbie brand, and the Defy Bra is up there as one of my favourite and most comfortable bras ever, so I was instantly intrigued when I spotted this newer scoop neck design from the American label. Designed to be one of the best bras for back fat, this longline style looks like a basic vest, but it offers far more than that. In a similar way to my favourite M&S Hidden Support Vest, this piece has a built-in bra that sits like a discreet crop top inside the longer camisole, and the lingerie-meets-shapewear hybrid provides lift and hold for my bust while smoothing and contouring my back, sides and tummy to create a sleek and neat silhouette. After a few days of wear, it has really impressed me and does everything I hoped it would.

I get very frustrated with overspill around my bra, and have sometimes avoided wearing clingier tops due to worries about lumps and bumps at the back. This well-designed piece cancels out any concern without the need for layering up a bra and a smoothing slip – it does two jobs in one, and as it falls on my hips, it also cancels out any pesky overhang on the waistband of my jeans and skirts too. Win, win!

Shop the Bra

I wore the Evelyn & Bobbie piece over a couple of days before washing it and wearing it again. While testing the bra, I considered the design, the fit, the fabric and the support, as well as how smoothing it was around my bust, sides and back.

Evelyn & Bobbie Structured Scoop Bra Tank: Comfort & Fit

The bra is a pull-on style, which means you won't need to faff about with fiddly clasps and fastenings at the back, and although it is a little bit of a squeeze to get on at first, once it's pulled into position, it feels wonderfully comfy and very easy to move around in. I found that it managed to stay where it was supposed to be without riding up around my tummy or back. It does feel a little snug after you pop it on, but the firm and stretchy material is designed to mould to your natural shape and curves over time, and the brand suggests wearing it for a couple of days to let it adapt to your body and fit nicely. It really does work, and it was much easier to pull on after a couple of wears, and I found that the stretch fabric moved with me rather than against me for a comfy feel.

This bra is wire-free, which means it isn’t rigid or stiff, and as with the rest of the collection from the brand, the clever shaping of the cups and technical fabric will provide hold for even very big boobs, and will evenly distribute the weight of your bust to minimise the risk of any pressure points or back strain. On top of that, the straps are wide to offer extra support, which makes this one of the best bras for large busts too.

Of course, as well as the bust support, this longer line style promises to keep any lumpy areas around your back, waist and tummy to a minimum too, and it really does. I was impressed by how sleek it made my top half look, but without the overly tight feeling I often get from a standard shaping top or a slip, and I can easily wear it under a tight tshirt or slim-fit dress knowing that it will flatter from all angles. It adds a gentle firmness to my frame and means I can get dressed in a hurry without any worries about my outfit clinging to certain areas.

I expected the longer style to feel a little hot and sweaty to wear on a warm day, and I wasn’t so sure about an extra layer under my shirt, but the thin polyamide and elastane blend fabric is surprisingly cool against skin and promises to be moisture-wicking and anti-odour, so I think it’ll be a winner for the summer months too.

The sizes go from S-XXL, but because of the adaptable fabrics, each one covers a dozen or so bra sizes, so busts ranging from 30C-54H can find their match, and it takes a lot of hassle out of trying to guess the best size for you when buying online. I'm a size 12 and a 36B, and found that the Medium fitted brilliantly.

Evelyn & Bobbie Structured Scoop Bra Tank: Style

This bra is wonderfully comfy and smoothing, but in all honesty, when it comes to design, it's not the most wow-worthy. The overall look is quite simple and fuss-free, which isn’t the end of the world, but it does feel a little dull compared to some of my other bras, and it's not necessarily the sexiest piece of underwear in my drawer right now. The lack of lace, embellishment and trims does mean it sits invisibly under all clothing, though, and for everyday wear, the comfort and support definitely outweigh the understated design.

Another thing to consider is that the bra features much wider, adjustable straps than a lot of my other lingerie staples, which are great for support, but they might peek out a little from the sides of a sleeveless top, and the higher cut front of the bra vest may be tricky to layer under a lower neckline. Overall, though, I have found that it sits well under most styles or tops and frocks without any problems.

I opted for the soft sand colour as I think it will be the most versatile, but there is also a classic black option, as well as five other wearable designs, including pink and dark brown.

Evelyn & Bobbie Structured Scoop Bra Tank: Care

Despite the fact that the fabric is very technical, this bra is very easy to care for, and it can be thrown in the wash on a cool cycle. This was a massive bonus as I'm not usually a fan of hand-washing, and I found that it dried speedily and felt like new the next time I wore it.

Evelyn & Bobbie Structured Scoop Bra Tank: Verdict

I really do love Evelyn & Bobbie, and I have recommended this particular lingerie brand to lots of friends and family over the last few months, and I will be doing the same again after wearing this longer line style too.

The bra top provides plenty of shape, lift and hold for my boobs and kept my bust in check during a busy weekend, which involved shopping, a big spring clean and a trip to the playground with my little ones. I’m impressed by how much hold it offers without any harsh underwires or overly firm fabric, and I imagine it will be a great alternative to your best minimiser bra for anybody with much larger boobs.

The longer line is such a great idea, as it cancels out the need for my best shapewear on top of my bra and creates the most sleek and neat silhouette, which means I can wear a multitude of tops and dresses without any worries about lumpy areas or unsightly overspill around the back strap. It tucks into my jeans and skirts snugly too, and works very well to prevent overhang at my waistband, and all without riding up or needing to be readjusted throughout the day.

This bra is great for a little firm-up if you’re wearing something clingier than usual, or simply as a comfy base layer for everyday outfits. Rather than just focusing on back fat, this bra smooths and firms up my whole top half brilliantly and acts as the ultimate confidence boost with minimal effort.

Shop More Evelyn & Bobbie

I've tested plenty of fans in my time, which makes me tough to please when it comes to cooling. I'm even tougher when it comes to handing out five star reviews, but I just had to give the MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10" Pedestal Air Circulator a flawless score. It wouldn't have been fair to be anything else.

The MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10" Pedestal Air Circulator is new to the brand’s line-up of already impressively cooling fans. This one is particularly exciting because it’s broken records: quieter than ever before, cooler, and with special oscillations, it’s the fan that everyone will want to steal from you when the weather heats up, or for a nice breeze during the day.

I’ve been testing the fan in my home, with my family of hot sleepers. My mum, in particular, suffers from night sweats, and is the one who has staked a particularly strong claim to the MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10" Pedestal Air Circulator. Here’s what the family thinks of it.

MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10" Pedestal Air Circulator review

Who would the MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10 Pedestal Air Circulator suit?

The Meaco Sefte 10” is ideal for anyone who wants flexibility without compromising on performance. Its has the option to be used cordless, which is brilliant for portability and placing this in the perfect place. Not being tethered to plug sockets or rearranging furniture to stay cool is a big win that not many fans of this power can boast. I found myself moving it effortlessly from my desk to the living room and then up to the bedroom, and it never felt like a hassle.

It’s also particularly well-suited to light sleepers or anyone sensitive to noise. Even at higher speeds, the sound profile stays soft and unobtrusive, making it a natural choice for bedrooms, especially during hot, restless nights. It builds on that with silencing buttons, a sensitive remote control, and no lights, so you can control the fan from bed, without needing to wave your hands around and lift of a sleep mask.

What’s even more impressive, though, is that the quietness doesn’t come at the expense of power. I couldn't hear it running until it was working on the higher powers, and even then, it still could be whispered over.

Unboxing the MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10 Pedestal Air Circulator

Meaco is reasonable with how they package the MeacoFan Sefte 10 Pedestal Air Circulator. The box is as compact as it could be: it fits the fan in a box which is easy to lift and carry and which protects it in transit.

From a sustainability perspective, there have been questions raised over the small amount of soft plastics used in packaging, but Meaco explains that these are necessary and that the hit all sustainability credentials where possible. I managed to recycle the soft plastics at my local big Sainsbury’s, so if sustainability is high on your list, have a look for some soft plastic recycling points.

Inside the box, the MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10 Pedestal Air Circulator comes with its battery powered remote, two adjustable poles to determine the height of your fan, and a plug, which you can choose to use or not (the fan is battery powered and rechargeable).

Normally, really don’t like instruction manuals (either the pictures make no sense or the words are too confusing) but Meaco does a beautiful job of simple, clear instructions. Assembling and using the fan is actually really intuitive anyway, but it's still good to have a useful instruction manual

What is the MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10 Pedestal Air Circulator like to use?

You can control the fan in three ways: via the app, directly on the unit, or with the remote, each is equally easy and intuitive, so you can flick between settings or choose to use whichever one if the most convenient.

The remote magnetises neatly into the centre of the fan, which sounds like a small detail, but it's actually a really neat and handy feature to have. It's an easy place to store and find the remote when you want to change settings on the fan. The buttons are clearly labelled and satisfyingly tactile, letting you adjust fan speed, oscillation angle, and temperature response with precision.

What impressed me most about the remote is the sensitivity, a feature which Meaco is really proud of too. You don’t need to sit up or point it directly at the fan. When I was lying down, holding the remote low beside me, the fan responded instantly. You can also switch off both the audible “beep” noise and any indicator lights, which suits the bedroom and running at night particularly well, but we'll talk more about that later.

The same intuitive design carries through to the touchscreen on the fan itself. It’s responsive and reliable, ideal for quick adjustments when the remote isn’t within reach. It never feels like a compromise, which is a big win in my books.

Full height: whole room cooling

At its tallest setting (using both extension poles), the MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10 Pedestal Air Circulator is a surprisingly powerful air circulator. I had heard about the impressive Meaco engineering behind this fan before I tested it, but this is definitely a "see it to believe it" fan, because it delivers on even the most elaborate promises. The airflow feels broad and well-distributed, rather than harsh or concentrated, so it moves air across the entire room rather than blasting in one direction. However, when I wanted the airflow to be more concentrated, I could switch the rotation to get cooling air in the exact place I wanted it.

On its lowest setting, it produces a soft, barely-there breeze - I actually only knew it was running because I could feel the cool air. It's incredibly quiet. At higher speeds, it has the power to push cool air across an open-plan space with ease and still sits under 25dB on my noise recording device. This means, even at night, it fades completely into the background

That's one of the reasons that this took up a place in my mum, Sally's, bedroom. She suffers from night sweats, so is always keen to see what any cooling product can do to help her. She says that the Meaco is “the first fan I’ve used where I could actually sleep through the night without being woken up by it. You can feel it working, but you can’t hear it.”

Mid height: targeted, soothing airflow

At its mid height, this became my go-to for daytime use, especially when sitting and reading or working. The airflow sits perfectly at torso level, creating a cocoon of cool air without disturbing papers or feeling intrusive.

When I was feeling run down (and actually a bit ill), I was getting hot and uncomfortable, so I called on the fan for some relief. I definitely found it - at full blast, I actually combatted my hot, sweaty state and became too cold. The airflow is smooth and consistent, but not too abrasive. Sitting in the sun with a book, both my mum and I found ourselves reaching for this height again and again.

“It just takes the edge off the heat without making you feel cold,” Sally says and I’d agree. It’s a beautifully balanced setting and, I have been known to have it sat at the front of the room when I'm doing an intense yoga or pilates class - it's perfect for stopping the sweats.

Compact height: for the bed and desk

At its shortest height, the MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10 Pedestal Air Circulator proves just how versatile the fan is. This is where it works brilliantly on a bedside table or desk, delivering precise, close-range cooling.

I used this setting while working, positioned just to the side of my laptop. It kept air moving gently across my face and shoulders without drying or distracting, which exactly what you want when you need to focus.

Overnight, it’s even more impressive. With the lights and sounds turned off, it fades completely into your environment. Whilst Sally loved having the fan at full height overnight, when the night sweats were bad, she needed serious cooling power. Sticking this on max cooling power was perfect. "The blast of cold air, so close to be, must still not deafening, was a godsend," she says, "it helped me feel so much better and I actually felt calmer and less of a sense of dread going to sleep with it by my bed." It's proof that this covers whole-room circulation as well as quiet, personal breezes.

Should you buy the MeacoFan Sefte 10 Pedestal Air Circulator?

Truly, it's hard to fault a fan this. The price-performance value score is at the top (I would have rated it higher if I could), the build quality is really robust, and I found the cooling power, paired with the quiet score almost breathtakingly impressive. If you struggle with hot flushes and you want a versatile fan, look no further than the MeacoFan Sefte Pro 10 Pedestal Air Circulator.

How we test fans

At woman&home, we have a series of standardised tests that we put every cooling fan through. The Meaco was used in my family home, at the office desk, by the sofa, and overnight for a whole month before we wrote up this review. If you're interested to find out more, you can visit our dedicated page for how we test cooling fans.

Barbecues have evolved so much in recent years that choosing one can feel impossible, especially if you’ve never owned one before. From classic charcoal models to gas grills packed with fancy (and sometimes confusing) features, it’s not always easy to know which one is right if all you really want is something practical, easy to manage and simple to use.

That's a perspective shared by 48-year-old Jennifer Church, a member of the woman&home Tester Network who lives in Northern Ireland. A full-time working single mum to a rugby-mad tweenager with “a huge appetite”, Jennifer loves cooking wholesome, protein-packed meals, but had always avoided buying a barbecue because she assumed it would be “too complicated to operate on my own and too time-consuming to heat”.

After testing the Char-Broil Grill2Go X200 for three weeks in her back garden during a recent spell of warm, sunny weather, she discovered that modern portable barbecues can be far less intimidating than they first appear - and a genuinely practical alternative to firing up the oven or relying on an air fryer during the warmer months. Quick to heat up and easy to get started, they’re particularly well suited to busy households that needs dinner on the table fast.

Char-Broil Grill2Go X200 review

• RRP: £229.95
• Type: Gas
• Material: stainless steel
• Dimensions: 60 x 40 x 35 cm
• Temperature range: up to 320 °C
• Weight: 9 kgs
• Total BTUs: 2.7

How we tested the Char-Broil Grill2Go X200

The Char-Broil Grill2Go X200 Barbecue was reviewed by Jennifer, who is part of our tester network. Here's a little more about why she's the perfect person for the job...

Unboxing the Char-Broil Grill2Go X200

Jennifer felt a little intimidated when the Char-Broil Grill2Go X200 first arrived ahead of testing. “The box looked bigger than I was expecting,” she says, “but the barbecue itself is very portable and much more compact than it looked from the packaging.”

After unboxing the Char-Broil, she was immediately impressed by the barbecue's sturdy construction. “It’s a compact design but a really solid unit,” she explains. “But what really surprised me was how easily it lights and how incredibly quickly it heats up.”

That's by far one of the barbecue's biggest selling points, according to Jennifer. “The one piece of advice I’d give is that it cooks so much quicker than you would expect,” she explains. “Once you get used to that, it’s brilliant for anyone short on time.”

The built-in temperature gauge is another standout feature too: “I love how it shows you the internal temperature, so I know exactly when it’s ready for meat – which is always sooner than you imagine.”

What's the Char-Broil Grill2Go X200 like to use?

Having never owned a barbecue before, Jennifer says she initially felt daunted by the prospect of setting the Char-Broil Grill2Go X200 up. “I was worried about lighting a barbecue on my own,” she admits. “But I really shouldn’t have worried.”

Attaching the gas canister was the part she feared most, but that proved easier than expected. “I was a little nervous the first time, but it was straightforward, and I was very pleased to see the temperature gauge started going up rapidly straight away.”

However, the speed and intensity of the heat took her by surprise. “The grill heats to such a high temperature that it took a little getting used to,” she explains. “The first time I cooked burgers and sausages, I genuinely worried they weren’t done because they had cooked so quickly – but they absolutely were.”

Some portable gas grills struggle to deliver authentic barbecue flavour, but Jennifer says this one excels at this. “The chargrilled flavour and smell is amazing,” she says. “It says you can add wood chips, but I haven’t bothered because the smell and taste are already so good.”

For anyone looking for a manageable barbecue, Jennifer found the size and weight of the Char-Broil Grill2Go X200 particularly appealing. “The grill is easy enough for me to lift and carry on my own,” she says. “That was really important to me.”

Cleaning and storage also scored top marks during testing. “It’s easy to clean, and I store it in the garage when it’s not in use to protect it from the damp overnight.”

Who would the Char-Broil Grill2Go X200 suit?

The Char-Broil Grill2Go X200 is ideal for smaller households and people who enjoy outdoor cooking without the commitment or hassle of a permanent barbecue setup. “It’s just the right size for small families of two people, like ours,” Jennifer explains.

Whether you want to cook at a leisurely pace outdoors at weekends or squeeze in quick midweek meals between busy schedules, you're likely to appreciate how little effort this barbecue requires.

The portability is another huge plus for anyone who enjoys camping, caravanning or beach trips. Jennifer was apprehensive about how easy the grill would be to move around, but she found it compact, light, and manageable enough to handle on her own. In fact, it flipped her preconceptions of barbecues, “it’s so handy and easy to use,” Jennifer says. She'd recommend it to anyone who's new to barbecuing or due to be barbecuing solo, because it really is that manageable.

What are the drawbacks of the Char-Broil Grill2Go X200?

While the compact design was a hit with our tester, she thinks larger households might find it a little on the small side. “The size is perfect for my son and me,” she explains, “but it might not be big enough for bigger families.”

Those who regularly host large garden gatherings or who want a premium, feature-heavy outdoor kitchen experience may prefer a larger model with more cooking space and additional extras.

Jennifer also notes the need to use caution around it due to the intensity of its heat output. “It gets much hotter than you expect,” she says, “so you definitely need to adjust cooking times accordingly, and keep pets or young children away.”

Is the Char-Broil Grill2Go X200 good value for money?

Barbecues always need some research and saving, because they're big purchases. However, the value of the Char-Broil Grill2Go X200is an element where Jennifer feels it really shines. “I think this is an excellent buy,” she says. “It’s a fantastic price point for the quality.”

She was particularly impressed by how sturdy it feels while still being totally portable. “It’s heavy duty and well made, but still light enough for me to lift and carry on my own.”

Compared with larger, more expensive barbecues, she felt this offered impressive performance for the price. “It gives a lovely chargrilled flavour, even without adding wood chips, so it feels like really good value for money.”

Should you buy the Char-Broil Grill2Go X200?

The Char-Broil Grill2Go X200proved to be a confidence-boosting first barbecue experience for our tester. who thinks it's ideal for anyone looking to experience outdoor cooking in a way that feels simple rather than stressful.

“I would recommend this to anyone who loves barbecued food but doesn’t want to invest in a full barbecue,” says Jennifer. “It’s portable, easy to use, quick to clean and gives a lovely chargrilled flavour.”

For smaller families, empty nesters, single parents or anyone wanting a practical, affordable introduction to outdoor cooking, this compact gas grill strikes the perfect balance between convenience, performance and value. Just add sunshine!

When it comes to barbecues, Weber is the big-name brand everybody knows and loves. The Weber Spirit E-310 is the brand's mid-range gas barbecue, and it has a lot of love and adoration online. So before the summer really gets going, we thought we'd give it a grilling.

One of the most common compliments paid to the Weber Spirit E-310 is that its price point is perfect if you're looking for a pre-summer barbecue upgrade. Our expert tester, Celine, certainly was. With a 15-year-old barbecue that had seen better days, she was keen for an upgrade, so upgrade she did.

She's put it through its paces, hosting family and friends with some beautiful dishes. She's been getting under the barbecue cover to see whether this robust, reliable grill is your key to summer dining in style.

Weber Spirit E-310 Barbecue review

• Fuel type: Liquid Petroleum Gas (refillable cylinder sold separately)
• Gas burners: 3
• Main burners: 8.79kW
• Dimensions (lid open and side tables extended): H145 x W132 x D66cm
• Dimensions (lid closed and side tables extended): H113 x W132 x D69cm
• Cooking area: W60 x D46cm
• Cooking grates: Porcelain-enamelled cast iron
• Wheels: 2
• Weight: 51.9kg
• Assembly: 2-person self-assembly
• Colour options: Black

How we tested the Weber Spirit E-310 Barbecue

The Weber Spirit E-310 Barbecue was reviewed by Celine, who is part of our tester network. Here's a little more about why she's the perfect person for the job...

Unboxing the Weber Spirit E-310 Barbecue

Celine has actually already owned a Weber gas barbecue for around 15 years; before this arrived, she had some expectations laid out already. However, from the moment it arrived, she was blown away. She says, "Weber is synonymous with quality, and that quality was evident right from the delivery – in fact, the packaging was so good it took myself and my husband almost 20 minutes just to unbox it."

Getting the barbecue ready for grilling can be a tough task, but Celine found assembly was straightforward, with clear instructions. She adds, "There are a fair number of different parts involved but the instructions were very easy to follow and within the hour, my son had put it together for us, and we were finally ready to try it out on the first sunny weekend this spring."

I've known barbecues take up to five hours, so from box to barbecue in under 1 hour is really good. As Celine pointed out, it's helpful to have a helper around to speed the process along, but this is a great start for the Weber.

What is the Weber Spirit E-310 Barbecue like to use?

Celine's experience solidifies that the Weber Spirit E-310 is a brilliant barbecue for controlled, reliable outdoor cooking. From the outset, Celine noted that “it only took around 10 minutes and we were ready to start cooking,” which speaks to the efficiency of its three-burner gas system and reliable ignition. That quick preheat is paired with a clear lid-mounted thermometer, so you’re not guessing your temperatures.

Once up to temperature, the cast-iron grill grates come into their own. As Celine puts it, “they really retain their heat,” which is exactly what you want for consistent searing and even cooking across the surface, especially when you’re feeding a crowd.

Celine also found that the grill retains heat exceptionally well, a defining feature of its porcelain-enamelled cast-iron cooking grates. As she explains, “there was no frustrating cooling off which you can often experience with other cheaper BBQs,” which makes a noticeable difference when you’re cooking in batches or moving food around the grill. From a technical perspective, that level of heat retention allows for better caramelisation and more consistent internal cooking, especially with thicker cuts of meat. It means you’re not constantly compensating for temperature dips, so everything from sausages to steaks cooks with far more precision and confidence.

The Weber Spirit E-310 is always praised for the control that it offers: each of the three burners operates independently, allowing you to create distinct heat zones across the grill. Celine described this as the “piece de resistance,” adding that it made it “such a pleasure to cook different cuts of meat simultaneously without overcooking and the risk of charring.”

From a technical perspective, this is what turns a barbecue into a proper outdoor kitchen. You can sear steaks over high heat on one side, cook chicken more gently on another, and keep food warm on the raised rack without interrupting the flow. Celine tested this with everything from pork ribs to 30-day-aged rib eye and told us that “the results speak for themselves,” particularly when juggling different proteins at once.

The warming rack is another detail that proves its worth in practice. Celine noted that “the little warming tray ensured everything was ready to serve at the same time,” which is invaluable when you’re juggling multiple elements of a meal. Because it sits slightly removed from direct heat, it keeps food warm without continuing to cook it, so you avoid drying out meats or overdoing delicate items like halloumi. It’s a small feature, but one that adds a layer of control that seasoned hosts will really appreciate.

In terms of capacity, the grill strikes an ideal balance between everyday use and entertaining. Celine found that it comfortably catered for five people, but was quick to point out that “the size of the grill would easily cope with cooking for much larger groups of family and friends.” With generous cooking space and the ability to create multiple heat zones, it’s well suited to hosting, whether that’s a relaxed family lunch or a more ambitious garden gathering.

Overall, Celine found this was a beautiful and practical barbecue to live with. The sturdy wheels make it easy to move around, and the tool hooks, a condiment tray, and optional accessories such as a drinks holder and light are little details that culminate in a really smooth cooking experience.

She loved that “the size of the grill would easily cope with cooking for much larger groups,” yet the overall footprint still feels manageable in a garden setting. Practical additions like the enclosed cabinet, which she notes can “accommodate our extra-large 11kg gas bottle… with ease,” which is something that her previous barbecue couldn't accommodate. You might not think about this when you're shopping for BBQs, but it's a helpful way to keep everything looking streamlined.

Who would the Weber Spirit E-310 Barbecue suit?

The Weber Spirit E-310 is ideal for anyone who enjoys outdoor cooking and entertaining and wants a stylish, durable, high-performance gas barbecue that’s quick and easy to use. With three independently controlled burners, it offers the level of precision more experienced cooks will appreciate, while still being intuitive enough for beginners to get to grips with quickly.

Celine summed it up perfectly, saying: “If you’re in the market for a gas BBQ, I can’t think of anyone who wouldn’t like it.” She also noted that it’s “large enough to feed a family and more, yet compact enough to fit comfortably in smaller garden spaces.”

It’s also a strong choice for anyone who values longevity and is willing to invest a little more to get more refined design details. The build quality is solid and well-engineered, with thoughtful touches such as the neatly concealed gas bottle, which Celine particularly liked for keeping everything looking streamlined and tidy. As she put it: “This is most undoubtedly a perfect blend of Weber quality, good looks and outstanding cooking facilities.”

Cleaning is also very simple. The grill grates are designed to release residue easily, and the option of disposable drip trays makes post-cooking maintenance much less of a chore. In Celine’s words, it’s “worth it in my books every time,” – which, after a long afternoon of cooking and hosting, is exactly what you want from a barbecue.

Is the Weber Spirit E-310 Barbecue good value for money?

Priced in the mid-£500s, the Weber Spirit E-310 is firmly in investment territory, but Weber’s reputation for longevity makes the price tag easy to justify. Celine’s previous Weber lasted more than 15 years, and she still considers this a worthwhile upgrade, saying that “spending a bit extra now will reap rewards for many years to come.”

Rather than a seasonal buy, the Spirit E-310 feels like a long-term addition to an outdoor kitchen. As Celine puts it, “you get what you pay for,” and here that’s reflected in the build quality, cooking performance, and thoughtful design. Spread over years of use, it delivers excellent value per cook, not just per summer.

Should you buy the Weber Spirit E-310?

Overall, the Weber Spirit E-310 is a premium, well-designed barbecue that delivers on both performance and aesthetics. From its fast preheat time to the precision of its three independently controlled burners, it offers a level of control and consistency that makes outdoor cooking feel far more considered and far less hit-and-miss. The design details, from the concealed gas bottle to the thoughtful accessory system, elevate it beyond a standard grill into something that feels properly engineered for regular use. As Celine put it, “this is definitely worthy of the upgrade… a much more refined, and far superior cooking experience,” which neatly captures the step up in both usability and results.

More importantly, it’s a barbecue that invites you to cook more often. Whether you’re hosting a full table or just cooking for family, it takes the stress out of timing, temperature, and space, so you can actually enjoy the process. Celine described it as “a perfect blend of Weber quality, good looks and outstanding cooking facilities,” and that balance is exactly what makes it such a compelling choice. It’s reliable, versatile, and built with longevity in mind which, for me, is what turns a good barbecue into a great one.

De'Longhi is coffee royalty. They taught me everything I know and love about modern home coffee machines and their latest launch, the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine is an education in delicious coffee. They call it the "ultra" and, really, I think it takes the meaning to a whole new, caffeinated level.

The best coffee machines, in my eyes, should cover three elements. First, they should make delicious coffee. That's a non-negotiable. They should also give you space to play with flavours, combinations, temperatures, and strengths. And they should look good. It's a difficult trifecta to master, but the Eletta Ultra makes it look effortless.

From simple espressos through to elaborate affogatos, cold brews, and red wrens, this machine proves that you really can have it all. Here's more on what it was like to live with..

De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine review

• Dimensions: Approximately 26 cm W x 45 cm D x 38.5 cm H.
• Weight: 11.3 kg.
• Capacity: 1.8L water tank, 300g bean container, and 14-cup grounds container.
• Power & Pressure: 1450W, 19-bar pump pressure.
• Milk System: LatteCrema Hot & Cool technologies for hot or cold, silky milk foam.
• Cold Brew: Special Cold Extraction Technology creates cold brew in under 5 minutes.
• Coffee Customization: 13-setting grinder, 4 user profiles, and customizable coffee strength, temperature, and size.

Who would the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine suit?

The De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine is made for the coffee drinkers who want variety, quality, and convenience all wrapped into one sleek appliance. If your order changes with your mood, from a flat white in the morning to an iced latte in the afternoon, this delivers that coffee shop breadth without any of the effort. With dozens of drinks available at the tap of a touchscreen, it’s ideal for busy households, serial coffee sippers, or anyone who wants consistently good results without learning the ropes of a manual machine.

It’s also a brilliant fit for milk-based coffee lovers and design-conscious homes. The automatic milk system takes care of frothing, hot or cold, so you get that silky, barista-style finish without hovering over a steam wand, while the quieter operation makes it unobtrusive in open-plan spaces or early mornings. Given the premium price, it’s best suited to those who’ll use it daily, whether you’re replacing regular coffee shop trips or simply want your kitchen to be your favourite café, just a lot more convenient.

Unboxing the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine

Coffee machines are big and bulky machines, so the way that they arrive at your door is important. I actually love testing De'Longhi machines because they package them so well. The boxes are big, but they have handle spaces on both sides which make the heavy box easy to lift and carry around.

The box does come with some soft plastics, including plastic wraps and films that will need to be peeled off. This means that the machine arrives in sparkling condition without any scratches. I would love De'Longhi to find some sustainable, recyclable alternatives in the future, which is why this coffee machine didn't score a full 100%, five star score, but aside from that, it's wonderful.

De'Longhi also strike a lovely balance of being generous, without burdening you with clutter. They send a hot and cold milk frother carafe (which are the perfect size to keep in the fridge door), they also put a scoop and brush on the top storage compartment of the machine, and send you all the usual paraphernalia. You get a water filter, hardness tester, and cleaning fluid too. It's a generous offering that gets you started really smoothly.

What is the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine like to use?

The controls on the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine are really simple and sensitive in ways that make the machine feel ultra-premium. When you first set the machine up, the screen will talk you through user profiles. bean preferences, coffee flavours, water hardness, and all the other custom features on your machine. If you're already a coffee whizz, you're free to skip these, but they're important to take a few more seconds over if you want to make the most of your machine. Doing the process to the fullest, most rigorous standards didn't take me any more than three minutes, so it's no arduous process.

Can the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine make a good espresso?

The espresso test is important for looking at the fundamentals of how a machine extracts flavour from the beans that you're using. Behind the scenes, the machine has to find the right grind size for the beans, the right temperature and pressure for extraction, and use the right water temperature too.

I played around with different espresso types, sizes, temperatures, and strengths and was really impressed with the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine. It's sensitive enough to make notable changes, depending on what is requested, but also really consistent. I churned out 10 espressos, back to back, and the flavours across all were close to identical (and the machine didn't overheat).

Each shot had a thick, caramel crema, which is a visual indication of all the coffee oils that have been extracted from the beans. The espressos were punchy in flavour with bold notes and a wonderfully strong tone coming through. It was like drinking liquid gold.

Can the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine make a good black coffee?

With the espresso test nailed, I wanted to see how well the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine could handle water. If the water is too hot, it will scald the coffee, giving it an acidic and sour flavour, if the water is too cold, the coffee might taste a little flat. You can customise the temperature of the water that you add in, as well as how much water you want and the order in which you want to add water (before or after the espresso).

As you may have suspected, the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine makes a brilliant Americano. It adds in water at the perfect temperature for preserving the delicately extracted flavours of the coffee beans. I clocked the Americano temperature as averaging around 72 degrees, which is perfectly drinkable, just blow on it forst if you want to guzzle straight from the brew head.

Can the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine make a good cappuccino?

The last element that I like to test is how well the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine can steam milk. I always test dairy and non-dairy milks, which you can select for on the machine. You can also adjust the amount of froth you get with your milk, temperature and quantity too.

I was really impressed with the versatility on offer from the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine: the cappuccino foam, on default, took up about one third of my coffee, whilst the latte foam was about a finger's width down. The texture was smooth and glossy, rather than bubbly and foamy, even on my non-dairy milk tests, which are notoriously tricky.

When I moved across to the iced coffee functions and the cold foam carafe, I was equally impressed. The De'Longhi didn't hesitate to steam this milk in the same way, with impressive textures and versatility still.

Can the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine make cold brew?

I love cold brew coffee and it's a function that increasing numbers of luxury coffee machines are offering. Traditionally, they should take 24 hours to brew, but the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine makes it in minutes (and you can make up to a full carafe of cold brew, not just one glass).

It's as true to form as artisan cold brew would be: the flavours are smoother and sweeter than any other cold coffee, because there's no (or minimal) heat in the extraction. I loved the cold brew made in the De'Longhi, because it's one of the most gentle recipes that coffee machines follow. It was well-balanced, gentle, and light. I could have guzzled more of this than any other cold brew I've tested.

Cleaning and maintaining the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine

The De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine does as much of the cleaning and maintenance as is possible for a machine to do for you. The milk carafes clean themselves, it does rinses, and keeps you up to date on bean and water levels. If elements need cleaning or attention, the screen will flag it for you and then take you on a step-by-step instruction process for cleaning or troubleshooting the machine. I'm not one for following instructions, but the De'Longhi makes it easy.

Should you buy the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine?

Yes, the De'Longhi Eletta Ultra Coffee Machine is an investment, but if you're really serious about craft coffee, it's a no-brainer. Sleek, chic, and simple, it's any coffee geek's dream come true.

Smeg first stepped into the stand mixer space in 2010 with an undeniably attractive, retro design. It looked the part and our experts rated it for lighter tasks, but when it came to the great debate over the best stand mixer, it rarely made the final cut. Conversations were dominated by Kenwood vs KitchenAid, and Smeg struggled to compete on performance.

Now, more than a decade later, Smeg has gone back to the drawing board. This isn’t just a cosmetic refresh: the brand has reworked key elements of the original Smeg Stand Mixer design, from power to stability, with the aim of competing with the biggest names in baking.

I’ve been putting the new model through its paces to see whether these updates translate into real-world improvements and I’m impressed, with a cherry on top.

Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer review

• Dimensions: 24.5D x 40.5W x 44.5H centimetres
• Weight: 9.77 kgs
• Power: 1000W motor (previously 800W)
• Speed settings: 10 speeds with smooth start system
• Capacity: 4.8L
• Accessories: whisk, flat beater, dough hook
• Auto shut-off for safety

What is the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer like to use?

Whether you've used the older iteration of the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer and you want to know about the updates, or you're brand new to the shiny, sleek Smeg stand mixer, you're in for a treat.

I'll be honest, whilst I loved the old Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer, I didn't include it in our roundup of the best stand mixers. It was, of course, one of the prettiest, but I found it didn't have the mixing power or thoroughness to compete with the likes of KitchenAid. However, the new finishes have put it firmly in my top collection of the best stand mixers, because Smeg addressed any shortcomings and fixed ones I didn't even know about, resulting in a stand mixer that's a delight to use.

I whipped through my usual tasks with the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer: a kneaded dough (a good test for higher power and stability), whipped cream (the test for speed), and made cakes and cookies (the perfect test for reaching all parts of the bowl). I can assure you the results were quicker, more finessed, and subsequently more delicious than ever before. Do you need to spend this much money on a stand mixer? Probably not. Am I still envious of anyone who owns one. Absolutey.

Who would the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer suit?

The Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer has always won awards for its style and that's something that hasn't changed, if anything, it's even better than before. Available in classy pastels and classic colours, the curved edges and shine make it look even more premium and stylish than ever before.

It's also a great all-round baker now. The stand mixer easily whisks cream, creams butter, and kneads bread. I have no qualms recommending it to expereinced bakers and would happily hand it over to beginners as well.

What are the updates on the new Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer?

At a glance, you might not notice a dramatic difference, but the design tweaks are thoughtful. The signature retro style remains, but softer curves and rounded edges give the mixer a gentler, more refined look.

The colour palette has also evolved. Where Smeg once leaned into bold, high-gloss shades, the new range introduces softer pastels that are easier to style in modern kitchens. Classic black and white options are still available, so you haven’t lost that timeless appeal.

Performance upgrades on the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer

How do the changes on the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer play out in practice> Smeg has reworked the weight distribution and stability, so the mixer feels more grounded on the worktop. I tested this with a low-hydration bread dough, a task that would typically expose any wobble, and it stayed steady throughout.

The power has also been increased from 800 watts to 1000 watts, bringing it closer to key competitors. That boost isn’t working alone, either: paired with improved stability and a smooth-start function, the result is a more controlled, quieter, and noticeably more refined mixing experience.

To test speed, I whipped double cream, one of my go-to benchmarks. The results were strikingly quick, outperforming the previous model by a clear margin. Even better, it did so with far less noise. The older Smeg mixer was noticeably loud (and one of the reasons I didn’t recommend it in buying guides), but this updated version feels far more in line with the premium positioning.

The extra power also comes into its own when kneading dough. Heavier mixes that would previously push the motor now feel well within its comfort zone, with smooth, consistent rotation and no strain.

New attachments on the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer

Alongside the power upgrade, Smeg has redesigned the flex beater for better (or should I say batter?). It’s engineered to scrape the sides and base of the bowl more effectively, mimicking the natural movement of hand mixing.

In practice, it works really really well. It might sound like a small tweak, but even some of the best stand mixers struggle to properly reach every part of the bowl, so this level of consistency stands out.

I tested it on cake batter, creaming butter and sugar before incorporating wet and dry ingredients, and it delivered an even, smooth mix with minimal need to scrape down the sides. It handled cookie dough just as well, a tougher test that often exposes weaker designs, producing a cohesive, well-integrated mixture with ease.

Should you buy the Smeg SM05 Stand Mixer?

If you want my honest take, this is the stand mixer Smeg should have made all along. It’s just as beautiful, but now it’s powerful, stable, and satisfying to use.